5. The Liver. 
6. The Stomach. 
7. The Transverse Colon. 
8. The Small Intestines. 
9. The Bladder., 
1. The Heart. 
2. The Lett Lung. 
?. The Right Lung. 
4. The Diaphragm. FIRST LESSONS 
IN 
Physiology and Hygiene. 
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO 
Alcohol, Tobacco, and other Narcotics. 
BY 
CHARLES K. MILLS, A.M., M.D., 
> * * 
FELLOW OF THE COLLEGE OF PHYSICIANS OF PHILADELPHIA; LECTURER ON 
MENTAL DISEASES AND ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS IN THE UNIVERSITY 
OF PENNSYLVANIA, ETC. 
Revised Edition. 
Eldredge & Brother, 
Philadelphia : 
No. 17 North Seventh Street. 
188B. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1882, by 
ELDREDGE & BROTHER, 
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 
REVISED EDITION. Copyright, 1885. 
FERGUSON BROS. &. CO., 
PRINTERS, PHILAPELPH1A. The object of this book is to present concisely,, 
clearly, and in logical order the most important 
elementary facts in Physiology and Hygiene. Suf- 
ficient anatomy has been given to render the 
physiology intelligible. 
As far as possible, technical language has been 
avoided. The author has aimed to make each 
paragraph complete in itself, embracing a definite 
subject. 
The paragraphs treating of “Alcohol, Tobacco, 
and other Narcotics,” will be found in strict accord 
with the teachings of science. 
The “ Questions for Review,” it is believed, will 
be found useful not only in the regular course of 
instruction, but also for examination purposes. 
Philadelphia, April, 1885. 
0. K. M. 
III PAGE 
Introduction . . . .15 
Physiology, 15. Anatomy, 16. Hygiene, 16. Tissues and 
Organs, 16. Divisions of the Body, 17. Cavities of the 
Body, 17. Coverings of the Body, 19. The Lining Skin, 
UO. Glands, 20. Connective Tissue and Fat, 20. Func- 
tions of the Various Organs, 21. Stimulants and Narcot- 
ics, 21. Derivation of the Word “ Alcohol,” 22. Fermen- 
tation and Distillation, 22. Alcoholic Beverages, 23. Uses 
Of Alcohol in Science and Medicine, 24. Medical Conclu- 
sions about Alcohol, 24. Alcohol in Relation to Cold 
and Heat, 25. Poisonous Action of Alcohol, 26. Early 
Symptoms of the Injurious Effects of Alcohol, 26. Some 
Special Forms of Alcohol Poisoning, 26. Alcohol and 
Insanity, 27. Effect of Alcohol on Dogs, 28. Hereditary 
Diseases Produced by Alcohol, 28. Vice and Crime the 
Result of Alcohol, 28. Inebriates Succumb Quickly to 
Acute Diseases, 28. Alcohol Shortens Life, 29. History 
of the Use of Tobacco, 29. Derivation of the Word 
“Tobacco,” 30. Composition of Tobacco Smoke, 30. 
Effects of the Different Constituents of Tobacco, 30. Gen- 
eral Physiological Effect of the Use of Tobacco, 30, Evil 
Effects of Tobacco on the Young, 30. Absinthe, 31. In- 
dian Hemp, Opium, and Chloral, 31. One Drug Habit 
Leads to Another, 32. 
CHAPTER I. CONTENTS. 
V 
page 
The Bones . . . .36 
The Skeleton, 36. Number of Bones in the Skeleton, 36. 
Structure of Bone, 36. Composition of Bone, 38. The 
Backbone, 38. General Facts about the Bones, 39. Move- 
ments of the Spine, 42. Movements of the Head, 42. 
Uses of the Bones, 42. One-sided Development, 43. Dis- 
eases of the Bones, 43. Softness of the Bones in Early 
Life, 44. Brittleness of the Bones in Old Age, 44. Broken 
Bones, 44. 
CHAPTER II. 
CHAPTER III. 
The Joints . . . .47 
A Joint, 47. The Joint-Juice, or Synovial Fluid, 47. Im- 
movable Joints, 47. Movable Joints, 48. Ligaments of 
the Joints, 48. Pressure of the Air upon the Joints, 49. 
Unusual Motion in Joints, 50. Uses of the Joints, 50. 
Injuries of the Joints, 51. 
CHAPTER IV. 
Muscles and Movements. . .53 
Motion, 53. The Machinery of the Body, 53. Movements 
of the Limbs, 54. Muscle, and the Muscles of the Body, 
54. The Names of the Muscles, 56. The Different Parts 
of a Muscle, 56. The Tendon of Achilles, 56. The Struc- 
ture of Muscle, 57. Contraction of Muscles, 57. The Bi- 
ceps Muscle, 57. Levers, 58. Levers of the Third Order 
in the Limbs, 59. Action of the Muscles in general, 59. 
Effect of Alcohol on the Muscular System, 59. 
CHAPTER V. 
Muscular Exercise . . .62 
Exercise, 62. Muscular Exercise and Muscular Contractil- 
ity, 62. Effect of Exercise on Muscle, 63. Effect of Ex- vi 
CONTENTS. 
PAGE 
ercise on the Bones, 63. Effect of Exercise on Various 
Tissues and Organs, 63. Results of Systematic Exercise, 
64. Deformities Prevented or Corrected by Exercise, 65. 
Fitness, Variety, and Moderation in Exercise, 65. Time 
for Exercise, 66. A Sound Mind in a Sound Body, 66. 
Physical Endurance not Increased by Alcohol, 66. 
CHAPTER VI. 
Modes of Exercise . . .69 
Physical Educational Exercise, 69. Systematic Exercises 
without Apparatus, 69. Movements to Promote general 
Suppleness, 70. Gymnastic Apparatus, 72. How to Sit 
and Stand, 73. Out-door Exercises, 73. Walking, 73. 
Running, 74. Swimming and Bathing, 74. Rowing, 74. 
Riding, 75. Development of Both Sides of the Body by 
Exercise, 75. Open-air Games or Recreative Exercises, 76. 
CHAPTER VII. 
The Nervous System . . .19 
Regulation of the Machinery of the Body, 79. The Parts 
of the Nervous System, 80. Gray and White Matter of 
the Nervous System, 80. Divisions of the Brain, 80. 
Membranes of the Brain, 81. Functions of the Brain, 82. 
The Spinal Cord, 83. The Nerves, 83. The Cranial 
Nerves, or Nerves of the Brain, 85. The Spinal Nerves, 
86. The In-coming and Out-going Nerves, 86. Sensory 
and Motor Nerves, 87. Reflex Action of the Spinal Cord 
and Brain, 87. The Sympathetic System of Nerves, 88. 
Physiology of the Sympathetic System of Nerves, 88. Ef- 
fect of Alcohol on the Brain and its Membranes, 89. 
Different Stages in the Action of Alcohol on the Nervous 
System, 90. Nervous Derangements Produced by Alcohol, 
91. Effect of Tobacco on the Nervous System, 91. CONTENTS. 
vii 
CHAPTER VIII. 
PAGE 
Sensation and the Special Senses . .95 
# 
Sensation, 95. The Five Special Senses, 96. Feeling, or 
Touch, 96. The Media, or Clear Parts of the Eye, 96. 
The Coats or Coverings of the Eye, 98. The Nerve of 
Sight, 98. The Bending of Light in the Eye, 99. Pic- 
tures on the Retina, 99. The Process of Seeing, 100. The 
Organ of Hearing, 101. The Nerve of Hearing, 102. The 
Process of Hearing, 102. Taste, 103. Smell, 103. Effect 
of Alcohol on the Eye, 104. Effect of Tobacco on Sight 
and Hearing, 104. Effect of Tobacco on the Lips, Tongue, 
and Teeth, 105. 
CHAPTER IX. 
Care of the Nervous System and Sense Organs 108 
Importance of Caring for the Nervous System, 108. Exer- 
cise of the Brain, 108. Causes of Disease of the Brain 
and Nervous System, 109. Paralysis, 109. Sleep, 110. 
Defects of Sight, 111. IIow to Preserve Good Sight, 111. 
Color-Blindness, 112. Care of the Ears, 112. Cultiva- 
tion of the Senses, 113. Sleep Produced by Alcohol and 
other Narcotics, 113. 
The Blood . . . .117 
What Blood Is, 117. Quantity of Blood in the Living Body, 
117. Composition of the Blood, 118. The Red Corpus- 
cles, 118. The White Corpuscles, 119. Clotting, or Co- 
agulation, 119. Clotting of Blood in the Living Body, 
120. Composition of Serum, 120. Composition of Fibrin, 
121. Water of the Blood, 121. Mineral Substances in the 
Blood, 122. Uses of the Blood, 122. Effect of Alcohol 
on the Blood and Blood-Vessels, 122. 
CHAPTER X. CONTENTS. 
PAGE 
The Circulation of the Blood . .126 
Machinery for Distributing the Blood,'126. The Heart, 126. 
Valves of the Heart, 127. Arteries, 128. The Veins, 130. 
The Capillaries, 130. Contractions of the Heart, 130. 
Description of the Course of the Circulation, 132. The 
Circulation through the Liver, 133. The Spleen, 133. 
How the Tissues are Supplied by the Blood, 133. Effect 
of Alcohol on the Heart, 133. Effect of Alcohol on the 
Liver, 134. Effect of Tobacco on the Heart, 134. 
CHAPTER XI. 
CHAPTER XII. 
Food .... 137 
Why we Eat, 137. Food, 137. Digestion, 138. The Differ- 
ent Classes of Food-stuffs, 138. Remarks on the Different 
Kinds of Food, 139. Quantity of Food Required, 140. 
Cooking, 140. When and How to Eat, 141. Drinks, 141. 
Pure Water, 141. Alcohol not Food, 142. Alcohol and 
Food Contrasted, 142. 
CHAPTER XIII. 
Digestion . . . .145 
The Organs of Digestion, 145. What Takes Place in the 
Mouth, 145. Digestion in the Stomach, 146. Digestion 
in the Small Intestine, 147. Chyle, 148. Absorption, 148. 
Lacteals, 149. The Thoracic Duct, 149. Lymphatics, 150. 
Absorption directly into the Blood, 150. The Large In- 
testine, 151. Effect of Alcohol on Digestion and the 
Stomach, 151. Experiments with Alcohol and Gastric 
Juice, 152. Effect of Tobacco on the Digestive System, 
152. CONTENTS. 
IX 
CHAPTER XIV. 
PAGE 
Breathing . . . .155 
The Air we Breathe, 155. The Blood needs Oxygen, 155. 
The Chief Organs for Breathing, 156. The Part played 
by the Nose in Breathing, 157. The Windpipe, 157. The 
Voice-Box, 157. The Vocal Chords, 158. The Lid of the 
Larynx, 159. Bronchial Tubes and Air-Cells, 159. In- 
spiration and Expiration, 160. The Lungs and the Chest, 
160. The Diaphragm, 160. Stationary Air and Tidal Air, 
161. How the Oxygen of the Air gets into the Blood, 
161. Oxidation, 162. Effect of Alcohol on the Lungs, 
163. Effect of Tobacco on the Lungs, 163. 
CHAPTER XV. 
The Air and Health . . .166 
Pure Air and its Relation to Health, 166. IIow the Air is 
kept Pure in Nature, 166. How the Air may be rendered 
Unwholesome, 167. Amount of Fresh Air Required for 
Health, 168. Air Spoiled by One Man’s Breath, 168. 
Excess of Carbonic Acid in the Air, 168. Deadly Effects 
of Carbonic Acid, 169. Terrible Results of Crowding, 170. 
Diseases of the Lungs and Air-passages, 170. Clothing 
with Reference to the Lungs and Breathing, 171. 
CHAPTER XVI. 
Ventilation . . . .173 
Ventilation. 173. Objects to be Aimed at in Ventilation, 
173. Natural Ventilation, 174. The Walls of Buildings 
Permeable to Air, 174. Artificial Ventilation, 175. Re- 
lation of Inlets to Outlets in Ventilating, 176. Tempera- 
ture of the Air in Living Rooms, 176. Moisture of the 
Air in Living Rooms, 177. The Ventilation of School- 
rooms and Public Buildings, 177. The Ventilation of 
Bedrooms, 178. CONTENTS. 
CHAPTER XVII. 
PAGE 
Excretion, or Getting Rid of Waste Matters . 180 
Wear and Waste, 180. Wasting and Destruction are not the 
Same, 180. The Principal Waste-products of the Body, 
181. Waste Water, 181. Carbonic Acid, 182. Urea, 182. 
Excretion, 182. The Skin as an Organ of Excretion, 183. 
The Lungs as Organs of Excretion, 183. The Kidneys as 
Organs of Excretion, 184. Similarity of the Organs of 
Excretion, 184. Effect of Alcohol on the Kidneys, 185. 
CHAPTER XVIII. 
Hints on Hygiene, Accidents, and Poisons . 181 
Rules of Simple Hygiene, 187. Asphyxia, 189. Apparent 
Drowning, 190. Asphyxia from Noxious Gases, 191. 
Heat-stroke or Heat-exhaustion, 192. Fainting, 192. 
Convulsions, 193. Burns or Scalds, 194. Sprains, 194. 
Foreign Bodies in the Eye, 194. Insects in the Ear, 195. 
Foreign Bodies in the Throat, 196. Foreign Bodies in the 
Nose, 196. Bleeding from the Nose, 196. Bleeding from 
Wounds, 197. Poisons in general, 198. Different Classes 
of Poisons, 199. 
CHAPTER XIX. 
Alcohol, Tobacco, and other Narcotics . 209 
Stimulants and Narcotics, 209. Derivation of the word Al- 
cohol, 210. Fermentation and Distillation, 210. Alco- 
holic Beverages, 211. Uses of Alcohol in Science and 
Medicine, 211. Medical Conclusions about Alcohol, 212. 
Alcohol in Relation to Cold and Heat, 213. Poisonous 
Action of Alcohol, 214. Early Symptoms of the Injurious 
Effects of Alcohol, 214. Some Special Forms of Alcoholic 
Poisoning, 214. Alcohol and Insanity, 215. Effect of 
Alcohol on the Muscular System, 216. Physical Endur- 
ance not Increased by Alcohol, 216. Effect of Alcohol on CONTENTS. 
xi 
PAGE 
the Brain, 217. Different Stages in the Action of Alcohol 
on the Nervous System, 217. Nervous Derangements 
Produced by Alcohol, 219. Effect of Alcohol on the Eye, 
219. Sleep Produced by Alcohol and other Narcotics, 
219. On the Blood, 220. On the Heart, 221. On the 
Liver, 221. Alcohol not Food, 222. Alcohol and Food 
Contrasted, 222. Effect of Alcohol on Digestion, 222. 
Experiments with Alcohol and Gastric Juice, 223. Effect 
of Alcohol on the Lungs, 224. On the Kidneys, 224. On 
Dogs, 224. Hereditary Diseases Produced by Alcohol, 
225. Vice and Crime the Result of Alcohol, 225. Inebri- 
ates Quickly Succumb to Acute Diseases, 225. Alcohol 
Shortens Life, 226. History of the Use of Tobacco, 226. 
Derivation of the word Tobacco, 226. Composition of 
Tobacco Smoke, 227. Effects of the Diffextent Constituents 
of Tobacco, 227. General Physiological Effect of the Use 
of Tobacco, 227. Evil Effects of Tobacco on the Young, 
227. On the Nervous System, 228. On Sight and Hear- 
ing, 228. On the Lips, Tongue, and Teeth, 228. On the 
Heart, 229. On the Digestive System, 229. On the 
Lungs, 229. Absinthe, 229. Indian Hemp, Opium, and 
Chloral, 230. One Drug Habit Leads to Anothei’, 231. PUBLISHERS’ NOTE. 
In previous editions of this book, the subjects 
of Alcohol, Tobacco, and other Narcotics, and 
their effects on the human system, were presented 
in a separate chapter. In some of the States 
the provisions of the laws enacted, require that in 
teaching Physiology and Hygiene, the effects of 
Alcohol, etc., shall be given “ in each division of 
the subject so pursued.” To meet this requirement, 
we have in the present edition presented the para- 
graphs relating to Alcohol, Tobacco, and other 
Narcotics, and their effects on the various or- 
gans, in connection with the physiology and 
hygiene of those organs. But, in consideration of 
the views of those teachers who prefer to have 
the whole subject presented in a single chapter, and 
to prevent confusion in schools that have introduced 
previous editions of the book, we have in the final 
chapter brought together the various paragraphs 
treating of Alcohol, etc., and present them in 
logical, methodical order, arranged for a general 
review of the subject. 
Philadelphia, April, 1885 
xii LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 
FIG. PAGE 
1. Cavities of the Body 17 
2. Organs of the Chest and Abdomen 18 
S. The Human Skeleton 37 
4. A Section of a Bone 38 
5. The Spinal Column 39 
6. A Vertebra 39 
7. The Skull. 40 
8. Bones of the Arm 41 
9. Bones of the Fore-Arm 41 
10. Bones of the Wrist and Hand 41 
11. The Bones of the Foot 41 
12. The Elbow-Joint 48 
13. Section of the Hip-Joint 49 
14. Principal Muscles of the Front of the Body 55 
15. Muscle Slightly Magnified 57 
16. Lever of the First Order 58 
17. Lever of the Second Order. ... 58 
18. Lever of the' Third Order 58 
19. Lever of the Third Order in the Limbs 59 
20. Calisthenic Exercise 70 
21. Dumb-Bell 72 
22. Indian Club 72 
23. View of the Left Half of the Brain 81 
24. A Back View of the Brain, and of the Spinal Cord and its 
Branches 84 
25. The Base of the Brain 85 
26. A Section of the Spinal Cord 86 
27. Section of the Eyeball 97 
28. View of the Ear 104 
29. Red and White Corpuscles of the Blood Magnified 118 
30. The Heart and Large Blood-Vessels 127 
31. Chest, Showing the Heart, Lungs, and Large Blood-Vessels. ... 128 
32. The Aorta and its Branches 129 
33. Arteries of the Fore-Arm 130 
34. The Arteries of the Head and Face 131 
35. A Vein Opened so as to Show the Valves in Parts 132 
36. The Stomach and Intestines 146 
37. The Thoracic Duct and Lymphatics -... 149 
38. The Larynx, Trachea, Bronchi, and Lungs 156 
39. Air-Cells Magnified 159 
40. Vertical Section of the Skin (Highly Magnified) 183 
XIII "The proper study of mankind is man” 
XIV PHYSIOLOGY AND HYGIENE. 
CHAPTER I. 
INTRODUCTION. 
1. Physiology.—The term Physiology is derived 
from Greek words which mean a story about nature. 
Originally physiology included all kinds of natural 
study; but, as the word is now employed, it is the science 
which treats of the uses and actions of living objects. 
Human physiology is a study of what is done by and 
in the living human body. It is a study about our- 
selves, about the uses and actions of all parts of our 
bodies—head and trunk, hands and feet, brain and 
nerves, stomach, heart, and lungs. It teaches us about 
the movements of the body; about feeling, seeing, 
hearing, smelling, tasting, and thinking; about eat- 
ing, breathing, keeping warm, growing, wasting, and 
dying. Animals and plants represent living nature. 
Minerals represent lifeless nature. Animals and 
plants are born, live, grow, and pass away according 
to certain laws, which differ from those regulating 
15 16 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
the existence of minerals. They have parts with 
particular functions. A function is the special work 
which any part has to perform. Physiology is a 
study of these functions. Human physiology is a 
study of the functions of the human body. 
2. Anatomy.—In order to understand physiology, 
we must have some knowledge of another science, 
called Anatomy, which may be defined as the study of 
the shapes of living things and of the parts of which 
they are made. The term Anatomy is made up from 
Greek words which mean a cutting through; and its 
real meaning is dissection, or the act of cutting an 
animal in pieces. Most of what is known about 
anatomy has been learned by dissection. 
3. Hygiene.—When something has been learned 
of rhe formation of the body, and of its uses and 
actions, it is natural next to inquire how to care for 
it and keep it in health. We learn this by study- 
ing Hygiene, which is the science of health. The 
ancient Greeks believed in a goddess, or guardian 
angel, whom they called Ilygeia, whose duty it was 
to watch over the health of the people. The term 
Hygiene is formed from the name of this goddess. 
4:. Tissues and Organs.—The word tissue means 
“ that which is woven.” The tissues of the body are 
its solid substances. These sometimes come together 
to form organs. An organ is a part of the body which 
has a special work or function. The body is made up 
of many tissues and organs. These tissues and organs 
are composed of minute bodies called cells. These IN TROD UCTION. 
17 
cells are too small to be seen witb tbe naked eye, 
but they have been well studied with the microscope. 
It takes many thousands of them to occupy the space 
of a square inch. They may be roughly compared 
to minute bladders. Each cell has the power of 
taking from the blood what it 
needs to build up its own kind of 
tissue. 
5. Divisions of the Body.—The 
body, for the sake of convenient 
study, may be divided into the 
head, trunk, neck, and limbs. The 
head includes all above the neck. 
The trunk is the solid, heavy por- 
tion between the neck and the legs. 
The neck is the narrow cylinder 
between the head and the trunk. 
Although a small, it is a most im- 
portant region, for through it pass 
great nerves and vessels, and also 
tubes for the passage of air and 
food. The limbs are the two arms 
and the two legs, the upper and 
the lower extremities. Each upper 
extremity is divided into the arm, 
forearm, and hand; each lower 
extremity into the thigh, leg, and 
foot. 
6. Cavities of the Body.—In 
the head and trunk are cavities containing important 
organs. The bones of the upper back part of the 
head form the cavity of the skull, or cranium, in 
Fig. 1. 
Cavities of the Body. 18 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
which is lodged the brain. This cavity opens by a 
hole in its lower part into a long, narrow spinal canal, 
which runs down through the hack-hone, or spinal 
column, and contains the spinal cord. In the lower 
front portion of the head is the cavity of the face, 
into which the nose and mouth open. The front of 
the trunk is divided by a great partition, called the 
diaphragm, into two large cavities; the upper of 
these is the chest, the lower is the abdomen. The 
chief organs in the chest are the heart and lungs. In 
Fig. 2.—Organs of the Chest and Abdomen. 
the abdomen are the stomach, intestines, liver, kidneys, 
and other organs. The organs contained in the larger 
cavities of the body are called viscera. These larger 19 
INTRODUCTION. 
cavities are represented in Figure 1. Some of the 
organs of the chest and abdomen are represented in 
Figure 2. 
7. Coverings of the Body.—The chief covering of 
the body is the skin. It is composed of two layers. 
The outer layer is very thin, and is called the epi- 
dermis, which means “upon the skin.” It is so thin 
and fine that it is easily rubbed off. It washes off' 
when we take a thorough bath. It is constantly 
being shed in powder or scales; but new epidermis 
forms as fast as the old disappears. In some places, 
as on the soles of the feet, the epidermis becomes very 
thick. It contains neither nerves nor blood-vessels; 
hence, cutting it does not cause pain nor draw blood. 
The lower layer of the skin is named the dermis, or 
true skin. It is well supplied with nerves and blood- 
vessels, so that cutting it causes pain and bleeding. 
The nails and hair are sometimes termed the append- 
ages of the skin, that is, they are something added, 
but not absolutely necessary to the skin. The nails 
are epidermis which has become thick and horny. 
They are slowly but constantly growing. It has been 
calculated that a person dying in his eightieth year 
has changed his nails two hundred times at least. 
Nails grow by the addition of new matter to their 
under surface and roots. They protect the ends of the 
fingers and toes, and make the fingers more useful for 
seizing small objects. Even the hair, like the nails, 
is formed from the epidermis. The true skin sinks 
in, forming a depression, or hair sac, from which the 
hair grows. 20 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
8. The Lining Skin, or Mucous Membrane.— 
When it gets near the mouth, the skin changes color, 
and we have the red lips. Looking into the mouth 
and down the throat, a red, moist surface is seen; 
we have the “ red lane ” as it is sometimes pleasantly 
called. This red, moist lining of the mouth, throat, 
and canals and cavities beyond, is mucous membrane. 
Any thin skin or film is a membrane, and this mucous 
membrane is in reality a continuation of the outside 
skin, so that 
“ There’s a skin without, and a skin within, 
A covering skin, and a lining skin ; 
But the skin within is the skin without, 
Doubled inwards, and carried completely throughout.” 
The mucous membrane, or “ lining skin,” is moister 
and redder than the “ covering skin,” because its outer 
layer is much thinner than the epidermis, so that red 
blood-vessels shine through it. Moisture easily escapes 
from these vessels, and from glands which are found 
everywhere in the membrane. 
9. Glands.—A gland is an organ which separates 
materials from the blood. The materials which are 
thus separated from the blood are called secretions. 
Glands of various sizes are found everywhere in the 
body. Sometimes glands are very simple in struc- 
ture, consisting only of thin membranes and minute 
blood-vessels. Sometimes they are large and com- 
plicated organs. 
10. Connective Tissue and Fat.—Widely diffused 
throughout the body is a substance called connective 
tissue, because it binds and connects together the 21 
ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
various organs. It is composed chiefly of whitish 
bands or cords. So completely does this tissue reach 
to all parts of the body, that if everything else could 
be dissected away, a model of the body, composed of 
it, would be left. In many places it takes the form 
of a loose web or network. Most of the fat of the 
body is lodged in the little spaces formed by this 
network. The organs are kept neatly in place, and 
the hollow and uneven places of the body are smoothed 
out by these two substances. 
11. Functions of the Various Organs.—The brain 
and nervous system control and regulate the actions 
and processes of the body. The heart propels and 
distributes the blood to every organ and tissue. The 
lungs supply the blood with life-giving oxygen and 
rid it of poisonous matters. The stomach, intestines, 
and liver prepare the food to be taken into the blood. 
The kidneys and skin cast out impure waste products 
from the system. 
ALCOHOL, TOBACCO, AND OTHER 
NARCOTICS. 
12. Stimulants and Narcotics.—The word stim- 
ulant is derived from the Latin, stimulus, a “spur” or 
“goad.” A stimulant is a substance which has the 
power to excite or increase the force of the nervous 
system. The word narcotic is derived from a Greek 
verb, narhon, which means to “ benumb” or “ deaden.” 
A narcotic is a deadening agent which diminishes the 
activity of the nervous system; and narcosis, the 
condition which results from the use of narcotics, is 22 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
a more or less complete paralysis of the nervous 
system. Alcohol, tobacco, absinthe, opium, Indian 
hemp, and some other substances, are stimulants when 
used in small quantities, and narcotics in large quan- 
tities. Their abuse has brought terrible evils upon 
the human race. They have certain uses, but only 
physicians, and those who have a thorough scientific 
knowledge of their actions, are competent to say when 
and how they should be used. Their dangers are 
so real and numerous, and they are the cause of so 
much misery and misfortune, that every one should 
be familiar with their injurious and deadly proper- 
ties. 
13. Derivation of the Word Alcohol.—The word 
Alcohol is derived from the Arabic, al-kahol, which 
means “ something very subtle.” It was used, origi- 
nally, to designate a fine powder with which Eastern 
women were in the habit of staining their hair and 
eye-lids in order, as they thought, to add to their 
charms. The same name was given after a time to 
other subtle powders, and later by Europeans to the 
spirits of wine. 
14. Fermentation and Distillation.—The term 
fermentation is applied to the peculiar change which 
sometimes takes place when moist animal or vege- 
table matter is exposed to the air at ordinary tem- 
peratures. Some forms of vegetable matter have 
an especial tendency to ferment. The juice of the 
apple is at first sweet, but after it has stood for a 
time it works, or ferments, and becomes “ hard 
cider,” which has a sharp taste and contains alco- ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
hoi. Alcohol can be obtained by fermentation not 
only from the juice of fruits, such as the apple, 
pear, peach, and grape, but also from seeds, grain, and 
other sources. The substances which yield alcohol 
contain sugar, and it is really from the fermentation 
of sugar that the alcohol is derived. By fermenta- 
tion alcohol is formed, but when thus made it is often 
impure. Distillation, from the Latin stillo, meaning 
to “ drop little by little,” is a process of separating 
the pure alcohol from other substances. 
15. Alcoholic Beverages.—Intoxicating liquors 
owe their specific intoxicating properties to alcohol. 
Wine is the fermented juice of the grape. Wines con- 
tain from seven to twenty per cent, of pure alcohol. 
Beer is made of malt, water, and hops. Ale, stout, 
lager, and porter are varieties of beer. The amount 
of alcohol contained in beer varies from four to ten 
per cent. Many beer drinkers seem to think that 
they are not taking alcohol, or not in quantities that 
can do any harm. Beer is harmful in proportion to 
the amount of it taken and because of the alcohol it 
contains. Hard cider is the fermented juice of apples 
and contains about five per cent, of alcohol. Whiskey 
is obtained by distilling grain or potatoes; gin, from 
fermented corn and juniper berries; rum, from the 
refuse of sugar and molasses; brandy, from the juice 
of the grape or other fruit. Whiskey, gin, rum, and 
brandy contain from fifty to sixty per cent, of alcohol. 
Alcohol is also the chief ingredient of the “ bitters ” 
and of many other “ quack medicines ” so largely used. 
They are alcoholic beverages in their most dangerous 
and insidious form. 24 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
16. Uses of Alcohol in Science and Medicine. 
—Like many other substances which are poisonous 
and deadly when improperly employed, in its proper 
place alcohol has a field of great usefulness. The 
“spirit-lamp,” in which alcohol is the burning fluid, 
is one of the most useful of inventions. In burning, 
alcohol gives forth no smoke nor soot, and yet evolves 
considerable heat, hence the advantages of this lamp. 
Alcohol prevents organic substances from decay; hence, 
it is used by scientists to preserve specimens. It is also 
employed to harden specimens so that they can be 
cut into thin sections for microscopical examination. 
Ether, chloroform, and other most precious sleep-pro- 
ducing agents have been derived from alcohol. Spirit 
lotions, consisting of alcohol and water, are often use- 
ful in external swellings and wastings. When the 
system is much reduced, alcohol may be of service, 
but its use should be directed by physicians. 
17. Medical Conclusions about Alcohol.—At 
the International Medical Congress which met in Phila- 
delphia, in 1876, Dr. Ezra M. Hunt, of New Jersey, 
read a paper on alcohol. The chief conclusions of 
Dr. Hunt’s paper were as follows: 1. Alcohol is 
not shown to have any definite value as food. 2. 
Its use as a medicine is chiefly that of a stimulant, 
and it can often be substituted by something else. 
3. The purity of alcoholic liquors is, in general, not 
as well assured as that of articles used for medicines 
should be. The American Medical Association, an 
assemblage of physicians from all parts of the United 
States, in 1883 adopted a series of resolutions, stat- 25 
ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
ing their conviction that “alcohol should be classed 
with other powerful drugs; that when prescribed 
medically, it should be done with conscientious cau- 
tion and a sense of great responsibility; that used as 
a beverage it is productive of a large amount of 
physical and mental disease; that it entails diseased 
and enfeebled constitutions upon offspring, and is the 
cause of a large percentage of the crime and pauperism 
of our large cities and country.” 
18. Alcohol in Relation to Cold and Heat.— 
Alcoholic drinks are often taken in the winter with 
the idea that they assist nature in resisting cold, and 
in summer to counteract the effects of heat. The 
testimony of science is against the practice. Dr. 
Hayes, the Arctic explorer, not only did not use 
alcohol himself, but on one of his voyages would take 
no man accustomed to use it. An increase of tem- 
perature occurs at first after taking alcohol, but subse- 
quently it rapidly decreases. Dr. Kichardson placed 
alcohol and cold side by side in experiment, and deter- 
mined that the great reduction of animal temperature 
is one of the most pressing causes in death from alco- 
hol. According to Parkes, the greatest fatigues 
both in hot and cold climates have been best borne 
by men who use no alcohol. Sir John Hall, an Eng- 
lish general, says that the healthiest army he ever 
served with had not a single drop of alcohol. Dr. 
Livingstone, the celebrated African explorer, in 1862, 
wrote that he had lived on the principle of total absti- 
nence during more than twenty years. He said, further, 
“ The most severe labors or privations may be under- 26 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
gone without alcoholic stimulants, because those of us 
who have endured the most had nothing else than 
water, and not always enough of that.” 
19. Poisonous Action of Alcohol.—That alcohol 
may and frequently does act as a poison has been repeat- 
edly demonstrated. The word intoxication is derived 
from the Latin word, toxicum., which means a “ poison.” 
Toxicum is itself derived from a Greek word meaning 
a bow or an arrow, it being the custom of the barba- 
rians to poison the latter. Strong alcohol when taken 
in large quantities will produce narcosis and death. 
Alcohol, absinthe, opium, etc., are not only injurious 
in themselves, but used once the appetite for them 
grows. Used in small quantities at first, after a time 
larger quantities become necessary to produce the 
same effects. They lead their victims on and on to ruin. 
20. Early Symptoms of the Injurious Effects 
of Alcohol.—Frequent headaches, sleepless hours, un- 
pleasant dreams, morbid feelings, and a sense of lan- 
guor and depression are some of the symptoms present 
in the case of the drinker who first begins to use al- 
cohol to excess. The work of physical deterioration 
thus indicated is accompanied by a gradual weakening 
of the will, causing disastrous results. 
21. Some Special Forms of Alcohol Poisoning. 
—Alcohol causes drunkenness or intoxication, sudden 
alcoholic coma, mania a potu, and delirium tremens. 
The drunkard, with his foul breath, his noisy tongue, 
his foolish or dangerous acts, his bloated face, and reel- 
ing gait, is in many communities an every-day warning 27 
ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
to young and old of the sad effects of drink. Coma 
is a profound state of unconsciousness. When a large 
amount of alcohol is taken in a short time, the per- 
son will sometimes drop down instantly, and will be 
found unconscious and insensible, cold to the touch, 
blue in the face, covered with sweat, breathing heavily, 
and with a feeble, frequent pulse, and sometimes con- 
vulsed. Many such patients die. Mania a potu, or 
mania from drink, is a form of wild excitement and 
fury which comes on suddenly as the direct result of al- 
coholic excess. Delirium tremens is the result of the 
excessive use of alcohol, or of suddenly stopping its use 
after it has been taken for a long time to excess. The 
disease begins with restlessness, sleeplessness, tremor, 
and depression of spirits, and often with disturbances 
of the pulse, heart, and stomach. Later the patient 
mutters to himself, talks wildly, or screams with fright. 
He imagines that he sees about him fiends, snakes, 
rats, or frightful monsters. He hears terrible voices. 
He is pursued by foes. Completely exhausted, he 
dies, or recovers only after a severe illness. 
22. Alcohol and Insanity.—The long-continued 
use of alcohol may give rise to various chronic forms 
of insanity. Dementia, or great mental enfeeblement, 
melancholia, or depression of the faculties of the mind, 
and its opposite, mania, or mental excitement, may be 
caused by alcohol. Alcohol also gives rise to a special 
form of chronic insanity, in which strange and dan- 
gerous delusions are present. Dipsomania, or “thirst- 
mania,” from dipsa, “ thirst,” is a term applied to that 
condition in which an individual has a constant crav- 28 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
ing for alcoholic drinks. Dr. Norman Kerr* holds 
that intemperance is a cause of insanity, and insanity 
is a cause of intemperance. Dr. Edgar Shepherd says 
that, directly and indirectly, forty per cent, of British 
insanity springs from drink. On the other hand, the 
defective nervous organization of the insane, is apt to 
render those of an unsound mind an easy prey to 
alcohol. 
23. Effect of Alcohol on Dogs.—Dogs whose 
food has been mixed with alcohol, if fed in this way a 
long time, become restless and melancholy. Accord- 
ing to Magnan, they have hallucinations; thinking 
themselves pursued, they run off affrighted, howling 
and snapping at the empty air. 
24. Hereditary Diseases produced by Alcohol. 
—Dipsomania may be inherited, and many other 
hereditary diseases can be traced to alcohol. Epi- 
lepsy, insanity, and paralysis frequently occur in the 
descendants of those who have been addicted to drink. 
25. Vice and Crime the Result of Alcohol.— 
Not only are vicious and criminal acts often com- 
mitted by individuals excited and unstrung by recent 
indulgence in alcohol, but its continual use in excess 
undermines the moral nature of the inebriate. He 
loses all sense of right and wrong. Reason and self- 
control are permanently impaired. 
26. Inebriates Succumb Quickly to Acute Dis- 
eases.—It is a matter of common observation among 
physicians, that inebriates, when attacked by some 
* American Psychological Journal, April, 1883. ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
29 
serious acute disease, such as pneumonia and typhoid 
fever, are more likely to die than the temperate. 
Alcohol has sapped their resisting power. It is 
difficult for the doctor to know how far to push sup- 
porting measures in these cases. In large city hos- 
pitals, which usually contain many victims of the 
alcohol habit, the mortality from such diseases is 
much greater than in private practice. 
27. Alcohol Shortens Life.—The abuse of alco- 
holic liquors shortens life. Statistics show that for 
every ten temperate persons who die between the ages 
of twenty-one and thirty, fifty-one intemperate per- 
sons die. The mortality of the intemperate is, there- 
fore,, five times greater than that of the temperate. 
28. History of the Use of Tobacco.—In 1492, 
Columbus beheld at Cuba the natives smoking cigars. 
This seems to have been the first knowledge of to- 
bacco gained by Europeans. Tobacco was not at once 
brought from America to Europe. In 1559, Hernan- 
dez de Toledo introduced it into Spain and Portugal. 
In 1560, Jean Nicot, French ambassador to Portugal, 
made a report to his sovereign about it.. An English- 
man named Raphelengi, who had accustomed himself 
to smoking tobacco in Virginia, introduced the prac- 
tice into England. Sir Walter Ealeigh began to use 
the pipe after the return of Sir Francis Drake from 
America in 1586. 
29. Derivation of the Word “ Tobacco.”—The 
word tobacco is supposed by some to have been derived 
from Tabaca, the name of a province in St. Domingo, 
where a Spanish monk recognized the plant a few 30 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
years after the discovery of America. According to 
others, it was derived from tabac, a name applied by 
the natives of the West Indies to the tube, or pipe, 
or roll of leaves which they used in smoking. 
30. Composition of Tobacco Smoke.—Tobacco 
smoke contains watery vapor, free carbon, ammonia, 
carbonic acid, nicotine, a volatile substance having a 
peculiar odor, and a dark, resinous bitter extract. 
31. Effects of the Different Constituents of 
Tobacco.—Symptoms of tremor, palpitation, and pa- 
ralysis, after smoking or chewing, depend on the nic- 
otine. Nicotine is supposed by many to be the only 
source of trouble in tobacco.* The bitter extract, 
however, probably produces the vomiting in those 
not used to tobacco. The carbonic acid tends to cause 
headache and drowsiness. The ammonia excites the 
salivary glands, and causes the acrid taste and dryness 
of the mouth and throat of the smoker. 
32. General Physiological Effect of the Use of 
Tobacco.—In small quantities, tobacco may pro- 
duce, for the time, a state of calmness and repose. 
This condition changes to one of nervous restlessness 
and a general feeling of muscular weakness. It some- 
times causes tremor and palpitation. When exces- 
sively used, or when used by one unaccustomed to it, 
dizziness, nausea, vomiting, faintness, and extreme 
weakness often result. 
33. Evil Effects of Tobacco on the Young.— 
Upon the young, all injurious drugs act with more 
violence than upon adults. According to Richardson, 31 
ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
smoking checks the nutrition and the bodily and 
mental development of the young to a serious extent. 
34. Absinthe.—Absinthe or wormwood is a plant, 
from the tops and leaves of which an oil is made 
called wormwood oil, which is a poisonous substance. 
The liquor sold under the name of absinthe is one- 
half alcohol; the other half is made up of water, 
aromatic oils, sugar, coloring-matter, and the oil of 
wormwood. In absinthe, therefore, evil effects are 
derived both from absinthe and from alcohol. Taken 
even in small quantities, absinthe gives rise to dys- 
pepsia, and it has a peculiar power to tempt its 
victims on and on to destruction. Absinthe causes 
grave evils to the nervous system. Weakness and 
trembling of the limbs are produced, and, later, giddi- 
ness and staggering. Partial insensibility and a fright- 
ful mental state, and severe convulsions may occur. 
A French physician records a case in which a man was 
picked up in the public street in an epileptic fit. He 
was known to be a large consumer of absinthe. The 
convulsions lasted until death—four days and four 
nights. During the last five or six hours of life the 
skin of the face became almost black. 
35. Indian Hemp, Opium, and Chloral.—From 
the dried tops of a plant known as Indian Ilemp, a 
powerful intoxicating and narcotic drug is derived. 
Besides the term Indian Hemp, the preparations of 
the drug are known by other names, such as Hasch- 
ish and Bang. It produces a peculiar form of ex- 
citement and intoxication, with strange and some- 
times horrible dreams. Wasting of the muscles, 
sallowness of the skin, dulness of the mind, inter- 32 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
ference with steadiness of movements, convulsive 
seizures, and loss of strength, result from the long- 
continued use of the drug* Opium, or some of its 
preparations, such as laudanum, paregoric, or morphia, 
are resorted to by some foolish people. The habit 
leads to dire results, and is most difficult to break. 
Chloral is another drug, the abuse of which has been 
the source of much misery. In those who become 
addicted to these drugs, and use them to excess, diges- 
tion, circulation, the nervous system, and mind may 
one or all suffer. Both opium and chloral make ab- 
ject slaves of those who use them. No one should 
use any of these drugs except on medical advice. 
36. One Drug Habit Leads to Another.—The 
habitual use of any drug, like alcohol, tobacco, ab- 
sinthe, chloral, opium, etc., is not only dangerous in 
itself, but the employment of one is apt to lead to the 
use of others. Frequently the man who uses alcohol 
to excess will be found to be fond of tobacco to ex- 
cess. Dr. Joseph Parrish, a well-known authority on 
subjects of this kind, says that he has known persons, 
habituated to the use of narcotics, who alternate be- 
tween morphia, chloral, whiskey, etc. They are not 
opium or chloral habitues, nor inebriates from alco- 
hol, but they are habituated to artificial narcotism. 
Questions for Review. 
What is the derivation of the term physiology ? 
What is physiology ? 
What is human physiology ? 
Mention some of the things studied in physiology. 
* Drugs that Enslave, by H. H. Kane, M. D. QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
33 
What represent living and what lifeless nature ? 
How do animals and plants differ from minerals ? 
What is a function ? 
What does physiology study ? 
Define anatomy. 
From what is the term anatomy derived? 
What is the real meaning of the word anatomy ? 
Define hygiene. Give its derivation. 
What does the word tissue mean ? 
What are the tissues of the body ? 
What is an organ ? 
What are cells ? How large are they ? 
What power has each cell ? 
How can the body be conveniently divided ? 
Describe each of the divisions of the body. 
How is each upper extremity divided ? 
How is each lower extremity divided ? 
How is the cavity of the skull, or cranium, formed ? 
What is lodged in the skull ? 
What is the spinal canal ? What does it contain ? 
What is the cavity of the face ? 
How is the front of the trunk divided ? 
What are the chief organs in the chest ? 
What are the chief organs in the abdomen ? 
What are the viscera ? 
Of how many layers is the skin composed ? 
What is the epidermis ? 
Mention some facts about the epidermis. 
What is the dermis ? What does it contain ? 
What are the appendages of the skin ? 
What are the nails ? How do nails grow ? 
What are some of the uses of the nails ? 
What is the hair ? How does it grow ? 
What is the lining of the mouth, throat, and parts beyond called ? 
What is a membrane ? 
Of what is the mucous membrane a continuation ? 
Why is it moister and redder than the skin ? 
What is a gland ? What are secretions ? 
What is connective tissue ? Of what is it chiefly composed ? 
Where is most of the fat of the body lodged ? 34 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
What are the chief functions of the brain ? the heart ? the lungs ? 
the stomach, intestines, and liver ? the kidneys and skin ? 
What is the derivation of the word stimulant ? 
What is a stimulant ? 
What is the derivation of the word narcotic ? 
What is a narcotic ? 
Name some substances which are stimulants in small, and narcotics 
in large quantities. 
What is the derivation of the word alcohol ? 
To what is the term fermentation applied ? 
Name some substances which have a special tendency to ferment. 
What do the substances which yield alcohol contain ? 
What is distillation ? 
Name and describe the different forms of alcoholic beverages. 
What are some of the uses of alcohol in science ? 
What are some of its uses in medicine ? 
Give some medical conclusions in reference to the food value of 
alcohol. 
Why are alcoholic drinks often taken in winter ? Why in summer ? 
Give the views of Dr. Hayes, the Arctic explorer, in reference to 
alcohol. 
What was determined by Dr. Richardson in reference to death from 
alcohol ? 
Give the opinions of Parkes, Sir John Hall, and Dr. Livingstone 
in reference to alcohol. 
Does alcohol act as a poison ? 
From what is the word intoxication derived? 
What will strong alcohol produce ? 
What are the early symptoms of the injurious effects of alcohol? 
What are some of the special and terrible forms of alcoholic poi- 
soning ? 
What is coma ? 
What is mania a potu ? 
Describe a case of delirium tremens. 
Name and describe some chronic forms of insanity caused by 
alcohol. 
What effect does alcohol have on dogs ? 
What hereditary diseases are produced by alcohol ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the moral nature ? 
Why do inebriates succumb quickly to acute diseases ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
35 
Does alcohol shorten life ? 
Give the history of the use of tobacco. 
What is the origin of the word tobacco ? 
Give the composition of tobacco smoke. 
What symptoms does nicotine produce ? bitter extract ? carbonic 
acid? ammonia? 
What are the general physiological effects of the use of tobacco ? 
What are some of the evil effects of tobacco on the young ? 
What is absinthe ? 
What is the composition of the liquor .sold under the name of ab- 
sinthe ? 
How does absinthe affect the system ? 
What is Indian hemp ? 
What effect is produced by taking Indian hemp or its preparations ? 
What effect has the opium habit on the system ? 
What effect has the chloral habit on the system ? 
In what special way are drug habits dangerous ? CHAPTER II. 
THE BONES. 
37. The Skeleton.—Every animal is formed after 
a certain pattern; it has a shape of its own, which de- 
pends mainly upon its frame-work of bone, or skeleton. 
The word skeleton means a dried-up body. As usu- 
ally seen, it consists of bones which have been cleaned, 
dried, and put together with wires. In Fig. 3 a front 
view of the human skeleton is given. It is not an 
attractive picture, but in the living body its ugliness 
is hidden beneath coverings of skin, fat, and muscle. 
38. Number of Bones in the Skeleton.—The skel- 
eton contains about two hundred bones, of which 
twenty-two are in the head, fifty-four in the trunk, 
and one hundred and twenty-four in the limbs. The 
number varies a little at different ages. Some of the 
bones which are separate in the infant or little child, 
grow together as age advances, and thus the bones be- 
come fewer in number. 
39. Structure of Bone.—Bone is firm and dense 
outside, but it lias canals and cavities within, which 
give it lightness as well as strength. The outer por- TEE BONES. 
37 
Fig. 3— The Human Skeleton. 38 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
tion is sometimes called the compact sv/bstance, and the 
interior the spongy substance. They are both well 
Spongy Substance. 
Compact Substance. 
Fig. 4—A Section of a Bone. 
represented in Fig. 4, which is a view of a section of 
bone. 
40. Composition of Bone.—Bones are composed 
of both animal and mineral matter. If about an 
ounce of muriatic acid is mixed with a pint of water, 
and a bone is placed in the mixture, in a day or two 
the mineral substance will be dissolved, leaving only 
the animal matter. The bone will still retain its form, 
but it will be so soft that it may be bent into different 
shapes, and, if a long bone, may even be tied into a knot. 
By putting the bone into an oven and carefully apply- 
ing heat, the animal matter can be burned out. The 
shape is still retained, but the bone is now hard and 
brittle. 
4:1. The Backbone.—The backbone, or spinal col- 
umn (Fig. 5), supports and holds together the rest of 
the body. It is a strong bony column, reaching down- 
wards from the skull, which is balanced on its summit. TEE BONES. 
39 
It has four curves, two forwards and two backwards. 
It is not, as the name backbone 
would indicate, a single bone, but 
is composed 
of many bones 
or vertebrse. 
The word ver- 
tebra comes 
from the Lat- 
in, vertere, to 
“ turn.” One 
of these ver- 
tebrse is represented in Fig. 6. It 
has a heavy part in front, and at 
several points are projections or 
spines. By passing the hand up 
and down the back, some of these 
spines, which project backwards, can 
be felt through the skin. The dif- 
ferent parts of a vertebra are so put 
together as to leave an open space 
near the centre. In the backbone, 
the vertebrae fit neatly one above the 
other, so that when all are in place, 
the holes or spaces come together 
and form a long tube, the spinal 
canal. 
4:2. General Facts about the 
Bones.—The only movable bone in 
the head (Fig. 7) is the lower jawbone, which works 
up and down when the mouth shuts and opens. The 
Fig. 6—A Vertebra, 
Fig. 5. 
The Spinal Column. 40 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
bony chest is largely formed by long hoops of bone, 
called ribs, which run around from the backbone to 
the breast-bone in front. At the top and front of the 
chest on each side is a slender collar-bone, while at the 
top and behind is a broad, thin, three-sided shoulder- 
blade. In the lower part of the trunk is a basin or 
pelvis made up of several heavy bones. The bones 
of both the upper and lower limbs differ in size, but 
otherwise are similar. One long heavy bone is found 
in the upper arm and in the thigh, while the forearm 
and the leg below the 
knee contain each 
two bones. The wrist 
is composed of eight 
small bones, in two 
rows of four each. In 
the palm of the hand 
and in the fingers we 
have a series of slen- 
der bones parallel to 
each other. The bones 
of the upper extrem- 
ity are shown in Fig- 
ures 8, 9, and 10. 
The instep and heel 
are made up of seven bones. In the middle of the 
foot are five bones, so arranged with reference to the 
bones of the heel and the toes, as to give the foot the 
form of an arch. This arched form is represented in 
Fig. 11. This arching serves to break the force of 
falls and jars and to give spring to the step. In the 
toes, as in the fingers, a series of slender bones is 
Fig. 7-The Skull. THE BONES. 
41 
found. A small, thick bone, shaped somewhat like a 
Fig. 8. 
Bones of the Arm. 
Fig. 9. 
Bones of the Fore-arm. 
Fig. 10. 
Bones of the Wrist and Hand. 
chestnut, and called the knee-pan, passes over the knee- 
joint in front. 
Fig. 11,—The Bones of tie Foot. 42 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
43. Movements of the Spine.—Although we have 
this long bony pillar up our backs, it is surprising how 
readily we can bend and turn and twist. It is also 
wonderful how perfectly this column bears the weight 
of the head and protects the contents of the skull 
and spinal canal from blows and shocks. One bone 
does not rest upon the other in the spinal column of 
the living person, but between the vertebrae are little 
cushions of gristle or cartilage, which help to prevent 
jarring in sudden movements of the body. In front, 
behind, between, and around the separate bones of the 
column are bands or ligaments, which hold the ver- 
tebrae together, and yet, being elastic, they stretch 
more or less, and thus permit considerable freedom of 
motion. 
44. Movements of the Head.—The first two ver- 
tebrae at the top of the spine have peculiar shapes. 
In the middle of the first is a ring or hole. From 
the second a tooth or peg arises. This passes upwards 
through the hole in the first, and upon it the head 
turns and moves as upon a pivot. The first vertebra 
is called the atlas. According to an ancient fable the 
god Atlas carried the globe upon his shoulders, and 
hence the name atlas has been given to this bone 
which supports the globe-shaped head. The second 
bone is called the axis, an axis being the straight 
line or rod on which a revolving body turns. 
45. Uses of the Bones.—The bones preserve the 
general shape of the body. As we have seen, the skele- 
ton is the framework of the body. The soft parts 
cling to the supporting bones. The bones enable THE BONES. 
43 
us to stand erect and to perform the numerous move- 
ments of the body. They form grooves, canals, and 
cavities in which important organs are lodged and 
shielded. These bony passage-ways and compartments 
are beautifully adapted for the purposes of protection. 
The skull is arched or rounded, and will not break 
easily when struck, thus affording the best protection 
to the brain. The spinal column is strong and rugged, 
that it may play well its important part in guarding 
the delicate spinal cord and spinal nerves. The heart 
and lungs are free to move, and yet are well protected 
by the strong, elastic, bony chest. 
46. One-Sided Development.—Most people are 
“ right-handed.” Children are. usually taught to 
use the right hand in 'preference to the left. The 
wisdom of this instruction is doubtful. Every child 
should learn to use both hands. The bones of the 
right side of the body become larger than those of 
the left, because the limbs of the former are used 
so much more than those of the latter. We should, 
as far as possible, give both sides of the body, bones 
and everything else, an equal chance for development. 
47. Diseases of the Bones.—In order that the 
bones shall be strong and healthy the animal and 
mineral matter which they contain must be in proper 
proportion. If they contain too much animal matter 
they will be too soft, and sometimes will actually bend 
out of shape. If they contain too much mineral mat- 
ter they will be too brittle. The disease from which 
one suffers when the bones contain too much animal 
and too little mineral matter is called rickets or rachitis, 44 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
which term is derived from a Greek word meaning 
the “ spine.” The disease sometimes shows itself by 
some form of curvature of the spine; sometimes by 
bow-legs and badly-shaped arms and ribs. The best 
remedies for such a condition are life in the open air, 
plenty of nutritious food, cod-liver oil, and prepara- 
tions containing lime. 
48. Softness of the Bones in Early Life.—In in- 
fancy and childhood even healthy bones are much 
softer than in adult life, and they may be bent out of 
shape if they are used too soon or in an improper way. 
Some of the forms of spinal curvature are caused by 
children and young people holding their bodies too 
long in certain positions. Bending over too much 
when reading, writing, sewing* or doing similar work, 
will give the bones of the spine an unnatural twist. 
In youth the bones of the feet are sometimes pressed 
out of shape and position by tight shoes. 
49. Brittleness of the Bones in Old Age.—In old 
age the mineral matter of the bones, which is chiefly 
a form of lime, becomes excessive. They lose much 
of their toughness and become brittle. Old people 
require to be more careful of their movements as they 
are in more danger of breaking their bones than the 
young. In some diseases a similar brittleness of the 
bones is produced by an excess of mineral substance. 
50. Broken Bones.—When a bone is broken, and 
surgical help cannot at once be obtained, the whole 
limb should be carefully supported, and the patient 
kept perfectly quiet. When a broken limb is prop- 45 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
erly set it heals by a regular process. A soft sub- 
stance is first thrown out between and around the ends 
of the fragments. This gradually, but very slowly, 
becomes harder and harder. If the bone is not kept 
at rest, the process of healing and hardening is inter- 
fered with, and hence surgeons use supporting splints, 
and require the limb to be kept at rest. 
Questions for Review. 
Upon what does the shape of an animal mainly depend ? 
What is the meaning of the word skeleton ? 
As usually seen, of what does it consist ? 
How many bones does the skeleton contain ? 
How many bones in the head, in the trunk, and in the limbs ? 
Why does the number vary at different ages ? 
What is the structure of the outer portion of a bone ? 
What does a bone contain within ? 
What is the outer substance of bone called ? 
What name is applied to the inner substance ? 
Of what two kinds of matter is bone composed? 
Describe an experiment for dissolving the mineral matter. 
How can the animal matter be removed ? 
What purpose is served by the backbone ? 
Describe the backbone. 
What are the vertebrae ? Describe a vertebra. 
How is the spinal canal formed? 
What bone in the head is movable ? 
How is the bony chest formed ? 
Describe the situation of the collar-bone and shoulder-blade. 
What is found in the lower part of the trunk ? 
How many bones are present in the arm, thigh, forearm, and leg! 
Of how many bones is the wrist composed ? 
What bones are found in the hand and fingers ? 
How many bones are in the instep and heel ? 
How many bones are in the middle of the foot? 
How are they arranged ? 46 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
What bones are found in the toes ? 
What is the knee-pan ? 
What is present between the vertebrae? 
How are the vertebrae held together ? 
Describe the first two vertebrae at the top of the spine. 
What is the name of the first vertebra ? Why was it so named ? 
What is the name of the second vertebra? 
What was the origin of this name ? 
What are some of the uses of the bones ? 
What is the shape of the skull ? 
Why is the skull arched or rounded ? 
How is the spinal column built ? 
How are the heart and lungs protected? 
Why do the bones of the right side become larger than those of 
the left? 
How should the two sides of the body be developed ? 
What is necessary in order that the bones shall be strong and 
healthy ? 
What is rickets or rachitis ? 
How does the disease show itself? 
What are the best remedies for rickets ? 
Why can even healthy bones be bent out of shape in early life ? 
Mention some of the ways in which deformity of the bones can be 
produced. 
Why are the bones of the aged brittle ? 
Why should old people be careful of their movements ? 
What effect has certain diseases upon the bones ? CHAPTER III. 
THE JOINTS. 
51. A Joint.—A joint is the arrangement which 
is found where the ends of two or more bones come 
together. The ends of the bones are smooth and 
moist. This can be seen by looking at the knuckle 
of a leg of mutton before it is cooked. 
52. The Joint Juice or Synovial Fluid.—The ends 
of the hones are coated with slippery gristle or carti- 
lage, which is kept constantly wet by a thick, sticky 
fluid, which is sometimes called “joint juice,” or “joint 
oil.” It has, however, a higher-sounding name, syno- 
vial fluid, a term made up from Greek words which 
mean “ like the white of an egg.” It is poured out 
by a little sac or bladder which is placed between 
the ends of the bones. In this way the joint keeps 
itself well oiled. 
53. Immovable Joints.—In the head, all the joints 
except those of the lower jaw are immovable. Most 
of the bones of the sknll have saw-like edges, so that 
one dove-tails into another very firmly. Some of the 48 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
joints in the lower part of the trunk are also immova- 
ble. Some joints, as those of the spinal column, allow 
a little motion. Between the bones which form the 
immovable joints is a layer of tough tissue or mem- 
brane. When a bone is struck a hard blow the shock 
causes it to vibrate and sometimes to break. The 
tough membrane between the bones serves to deaden 
this shock and prevent breaking. 
54. Movable Joints.—Movable joints are those 
which allow motion of one part of the body upon 
another. They differ according to the 
kind of motion which they permit. A 
hinge-joint, such as is found at the elbow, 
knee, or ankle allows a forward and back- 
ward movement, like that of a door on its 
hinges. Figure 12 represents the elbow- 
joint. A ball-and-socket joint is one in 
which a rounded surface on the end of one 
bone moves in a cup in another. Joints 
of this sort are found at the shoulder and 
hip. A pivot-joint is formed by one 
bone, shaped like a peg or pivot, fitting into a hole 
in another bone. The best example of this is fur- 
nished by the two bones at the top of the spinal 
column. 
Fig. 12. 
The Elbow-Joint. 
55. Ligaments of the Joints.—Bands or slips, 
called ligaments, from the Latin word ligare, “ to bind,” 
pass from one bone to the other at the joints. These 
ligaments prevent the bones from getting too far apart. 
They tie them together loosely, so that they can move 
upon each other to a certain extent. The sac or THE JOINTS. 
49 
bladder which secretes the “joint-juice,” or synovial 
fluid, also acts as a ligament, one side of it being 
attached around the end of one bone, and the other 
around the extremity of the opposite bone. 
56. Pressure of the Air upon the Joints.—The air, 
although invisible, is a great force and is always 
exerting pressure. It is supposed that this pressure 
of the air assists the ligaments in keeping the bones 
Fig. 13.—Section of the Hip-Joint. 
in place at the joints. The thigh-bone at the hip- 
joint is certainly kept in position partly by the pres- 
sure of the atmosphere. Figure 13 represents a 
section of the hip-joint. The head of the thigh-bone 
fits very closely in the socket. The cavity of the joint 
is, moreover, completely closed by the synovial sac. 
If, while the bones are in position, a hole be bored 50 
FIRST LFSSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
into the joint, so as to allow air to get into its cavity, 
the head of the thigh-bone will at once fall partly out 
of the socket, the pressure of the air now acting both 
from within and without. 
57. Unusual Motion in Joints.—Some people have 
great freedom of motion in their joints. They can, 
for instance, bend their hands backwards, and their 
fingers backwards and sidewise. They are probably 
able to do this because the joint-ligaments are longer 
than usual, and hence allow more separation of the 
ends of the bones. Children for sport sometimes pull 
their fingers to “ make their joints crack.” This is a 
dangerous habit, for by so doing they may overstretch 
the ligaments of the joints, and cause an injury which 
it will be hard to remedy. 
58. Uses of the Joints.—Without our numerous 
movable joints we would be stiff and awkward crea- 
tures. The useful and graceful movements which we 
can now make would be impossible. The joints are 
so arranged as to allow each movable part of the body 
to perform its movements to the best advantage. At 
the elbow a forward and backward movement of the 
forearm upon the arm is all that is permitted by the 
hinge-joint, but this is all that is required to make the 
arm most useful. The cup of the ball-and-socket-joint 
at the shoulder is shallow, and movements of the arm 
can be made in almost any direction. The socket of 
the hip-joint is deep, an arrangement which allows 
less freedom of motion, but gives greater firmness and 
security. The pivot-joint of the spinal column is sup- 
plied with ligaments which permit the head to move QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
51 
from side to side, but not far enough in any direction 
to damage the delicate nervous matter within the skull 
and spine. The superiority of man over other animals 
is largely due to the number and the perfection of the 
movements which can be performed by the hand and 
fingers; and these movements are made possible by 
numerous joints. 
59. Injuries of the Joints.—Sudden jars, falls, or 
blows may wrench a joint or put it out of place. The 
violent twisting and tearing of the ligaments and soft 
parts about a joint is called a sprain. A joint is put 
out of place, or dislocated, when the ends of the bones, 
which naturally work upon each other, are forced apart. 
Sometimes in ball-and-socket-joints the, smooth round 
head of the bone is pulled entirely out of the socket 
in which it should always play. Remembering these 
facts, children should not be too rough in their sports. 
Injured joints should be promptly attended to or per- 
manent mischief may result. Dislocations should be 
set as soon as possible. 
Questions for Review. 
What is a joint? 
With what are the ends of the bones coated ? 
How are they kept moist ? 
What is the scientific name of the joint-juice ? 
From what is the term “ synovial” derived? 
By what is the synovial fluid secreted ? 
What are the only movable joints of the head? 
How are most of the bones of the skull united ? 
Where, besides in the head, are immovable joints found? 
How much motion do the joints of the spinal column allow? 52 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
What is present between the bones which form the immovable 
joints ? 
What is the effect of striking a bone a hard blow ? 
What purpose does the tough membrane between the bones serve ? 
What are movable joints? How do they differ? 
What is a hinge-joint? Where are hinge-joints found? 
What is a ball-and-socket-joint? What joints are of this kind? 
What is a pivot-joint? What is the best example of a pivot-joint? 
What are the ligaments of the joints? 
From what is the word ligament derived ? 
How do the ligaments of the joints act? 
How does the sac or bladder which secretes the joint-juice act? 
What assists the ligaments in keeping the bones in place ? 
How does the head of the thigh-bone fit in its socket? 
How is the cavity of the hip-joint closed? 
How can it be proved by experiment that the pressure of the air 
helps to keep the hip-joint in place? 
Why have some people greater freedom of motion in their joints 
than others? 
What dangerous habit have some children ? Why ? 
How are the joints arranged with reference to movements ? 
What movement is permitted at the elbow ? 
Why is the socket at the shoulder-joint shallow? 
Why is the socket of the hip-joint deep? 
How is the pivot-joint in the neck strengthened ? 
To what is the superiority of man over other animals*largely due? 
What is a sprain ? What is a dislocation ? 
Why should injured joints be attended to promptly? CHAPTER IV. 
MUSCLES AND MOVEMENTS. 
60. Motion.—Motion exists everywhere. Every 
living animal is in some way blessed with motion. 
Sometimes a little motion is all that tells us that an 
animal is alive. We can study the forms of motion 
in animals in different ways. Sometimes the study is 
about the movement of the whole animal from place 
to place, as of a man walking, a fish swimming, or 
a bird flying; this we call locomotion. Sometimes 
it is about the movement of a part of the animal, 
as of a limb in striking or kicking, or of the eye 
when it turns from side to side. Sometimes it is 
about the movements of fluids or gases, as of blood 
in the vessels, and of the air in the lungs. 
61. The Machinery of the Body. — The body 
may be compared to a machine. Some machines are 
simple, both as regards the manner in which they are 
made and the work they have to do; others are com- 
plex, have more parts, and serve more purposes. The 
human body resembles the latter class. Mechanics is 
the science of machinery, and in studying the body 54 
FIRST LFSSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
we are, therefore, learning lessons in animal mechanics. 
The limbs have their levers and cords ; the jaw moves 
up and down on its hinges; the blood is distributed 
by its pump and pipes; the lungs act as bellows, 
drawing in and forcing out air; the food is pushed 
onward by the movement of the food-canal. For 
eating, drinking, seeing, hearing, thinking, and all 
other functions, a special machinery is provided. 
All these functions in some way involve motion; 
62. Movements of the Limbs.—We shall study 
in this Chapter chiefly about the machinery and move- 
ments of the limbs. Compared with some of the fine 
changes which are going on in the hidden places of 
the body, these movements are coarse and rough; and 
yet they are wonderful when deeply studied. The 
movements of our limbs are directly brought about 
by the help of bones and joints, which have just 
been considered, and of the muscles, which we shall 
now study. The bones, and everything which clings 
to them, are moved by the muscles. The joints per- 
mit this motion. The muscles are the motors, or 
movers; in some way they do the pulling and push- 
ing which cause the motion. 
63. Muscle and the Muscles of the Body.— 
Muscle is the flesh or lean meat. "When we eat lean 
beefsteak or mutton we are eating muscle. It com- 
prises a large part of the human body. It is arranged 
in many different masses or bundles, which form the 
muscles, of which the body contains more than five 
hundred. Fig. 14 exhibits the principal muscles of 
the front of the body. MUSCLES AND MOVEMENTS. 
55 
Internal Vastus. 
Fig. 14.—Principal Muscles of the Front of the Body. 56 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
64. The Names of the Muscles.—Each muscle 
has its own name, which has been given to it because 
of something peculiar in its shape, size, or appear- 
ance. The pectoral muscle is the muscle of the breast 
or chest, pectus being the Latin for “breast” or 
“ chest.” Biceps means “ two-headed,” and triceps, 
“ three-headed,” the first of these muscles beginning in 
two parts and the second in three. The large, thick 
muscle covering the shoulder-joint is called the deltoid, 
because of its likeness to the Greek letter A [delta). 
The oblique muscles have their fibres running in a 
slanting direction; while the fibres of the recti or 
straight muscles run more directly. The meaning of 
the word sartorius is, “ belonging to a tailor,” and the 
muscle crossing the thigh, which is the longest in the 
body, is so named because a tailor uses it in crossing 
his legs. The internal vastus muscle is of “vast” 
size. The soleus muscle, forming part of the “calf” 
of the leg, is so termed from a supposed resemblance 
to the sole of a foot or shoe. 
65. The Different Parts of a Muscle.—A muscle 
has a middle fleshy part, which is called the body, and 
two ends of tough, whitish material, called the sinews 
or tendons. Sometimes these tendons are short, some- 
times they are long, sometimes they are round, some- 
times flat. They are always strong. 
66. The Tendon of Achilles.—The strongest ten- 
don of the body is the tendon of Achilles (as shown in 
Fig. 11, page 41, and Fig. 14, page 55), which runs 
from the muscles of the calf to the heel. This tendon 
received its name in a curious way. The story is that MUSCLES AND MOVEMENTS. 
57 
Achilles, a famous Greek hero, when a babe, was 
dipped by his mother into the river Styx, the waters 
of which rendered the body invulnerable. When the 
dipping took place the child was held by the heel. 
Achilles passed unharmed through many wars, but 
finally came to his death from an arrow-wound in 
the heel. Anatomists, therefore, have called this ten- 
don of the heel the tendon of Achilles. 
67. The Structure of Muscle.—The body, or 
fleshy part, of the muscle is made up of a large num- 
ber of strings or fibres of flesh, running in the same 
direction. These are held together by a 
web of connective tissue, and they are 
arranged in bundles of different sizes, as 
shown in Fig. 15. 
68. Contraction of Muscles.— All 
muscle can contract or shorten itself. As 
muscles contract they become thicker; 
they spread out sidewise. Contractility 
belongs to muscle; it is one of its prop- 
erties. Muscles can be made to contract in various 
ways, for instance, by applying to them a current of 
electricity. When the arm, leg, hand, foot, mouth or 
eyelid, or any other part, is moved, it is through a mus- 
cular contraction. 
rig, 15—Muscle 
slightly Magnified, 
69. The Biceps Muscle.—Let us select one muscle 
and study its actions. When the forearm is bent, in 
bringing the hand up towards the shoulder, a distinct 
bulging occurs between the elbow and the shoulder. 
This is caused by the contraction of the large muscle 
on the front of the arm, called the biceps. Two cords. 58 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
go up from the body of the muscle to points above. 
A single cord goes to one of the bones of the fore- 
arm. The forearm can move freely on the arm at the 
elbow-joint, both of its bones moving together. The 
contraction or shortening of the biceps muscle must 
therefore pull the forearm up towards the arm, giving 
an illustration of the lever. 
70. Levers.—It may help us to understand better 
the movements of the limbs if we recall here a few facts 
about levers. A lever is simply a lifter or raiser. To 
carry out the act of lifting or raising, power must be 
used upon a weight; and the lever must have a place 
to rest, and a point called a prop or fulcrum, about 
which it can move. Levers are of three orders. In 
the first order the fulcrum is between the power, 
Fig. 16—Lever of the First Order. 
Fig. 17—Lever of the Second Order. 
and the weight (Fig. 16). A crowbar applied to lift 
a stone is a lever of this kind. In the second, the 
weight is between the power and the fulcrum (Fig. 17). 
An oar is a lever of this sort. In the third, the power 
acts between the fulcrum and the weight (Fig. 18). 
The boy fishing with a long rod often makes it a lever 
of this kind. He rests one 
end of the rod on the ground 
and thus gets his fulcrum; 
then, supporting it with one 
hand he applies his power with 
the other, and swings around the weight, which is made 
up of rod, line, and fish. 
Fig. 18. 
Lever of the Third Order. MUSCLES AND MOVEMENTS. 
59 
71. Levers of the Third Order in the Limbs.— 
In our limbs we have chiefly levers of the third order. 
Such a lever is beautifully illustrated in the move- 
ment of the forearm as shown in Fig. 19. The ful- 
Pig. 19—Lever of tie Third Order in the Limbs. 
crum is at the elbow; the weight is made up of the 
weight of the bones of the forearm and hand and the 
ball which is grasped by the latter; the power is in 
the biceps or flexor muscle, and is applied where its 
lower end is fastened to one of the bones of the forearm, 
and therefore between the fulcrum and the weight. 
72. Action of the Muscles in General.—Just as 
the biceps muscle has the power of contracting, so 
muscles everywhere have the power of contracting 
and producing movement. In contracting they act 
on the bones as on levers. Some organs, as the heart 
and blood-vessels, simply squeeze together as they 
contract. 
73. Effect of Alcohol on the Muscular System.— 60 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
Alcohol taken in excess injures the muscular system 
both directly and indirectly. It leads sometimes to 
what is called “fatty degeneration.” The fibres of 
flesh which form the muscles change one by one to 
fat. The muscles become weak, flabby, and wasted. 
Even the heart, which is a muscular organ, becomes 
affected in this way, resulting in “ fatty degeneration 
of the heart,” one of the most serious and fatal of dis- 
eases. Indirectly, alcohol causes loss of muscular con- 
trol. Every muscular movement is in some degree 
under the control of the nervous system. Alcohol 
impairs the nervous control of the muscles. This 
impairment is seen not only in the thick tongue, wan- 
dering eyes, and staggering gait of the drunkard, but 
also in a feeble and trembling condition well known to 
physicians as “alcoholic tremor,” which affects the 
limbs more or less permanently. 
Questions for Review. 
What is said about the existence of motion ? 
What alone sometimes tells us that an animal is alive? 
What is locomotion ? Give illustrations. 
What movements of the parts of an animal do we study ? 
What movements of fluids and gases do we study ? 
To what may the body be compared ? 
What is mechanics ? What is animal mechanics ? 
Give some illustrations of the machinery of the body. 
What do all of the functions of the body involve ? 
How are the movements of the limbs brought about ? 
What do the muscles do ? 
What do the joints permit ? 
What are the muscles with reference to motion ? 
What is muscle ? 
How are the muscles formed ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
61 
How many muscles does the body contain ? 
How did many of the muscles receive their names ? 
Define and give the derivation of the words pectoral, biceps, tri- 
ceps, deltoid, recti, sartorius, vastus, and soleus. 
What are the different parts of a muscle ?. 
Which is the strongest tendon of the body ? 
Relate the story about the way in which this tendon received its 
name. 
Of what is the fleshy part of muscle composed ? 
How are the muscular fibres held together and arranged ? 
What property is possessed by all muscle ? 
As muscles contract, how do they change in shape ? 
Mention one way in which muscles can be made to contract. 
Give illustrations of movements due to muscular contraction. 
When the forearm is bent on the arm what occurs between the 
elbow and shoulder? What causes the bulging? 
How is the biceps muscle attached above and below ? 
How does the forearm move on the arm ? 
Of what have we an illustration in this movement ? 
What is a lever ? Levers are of how many orders ? 
Explain the three orders of levers. 
Give an illustration of each order. 
What kind of levers are chiefly found in the limbs ? 
In what movement is a lever of the third order beautifully illus- 
trated ? 
In the movement of the forearm on the arm, where is the fulcrum? 
What constitutes the weight ? 
Where is the power? How is it applied? 
What power have all muscles ? 
In contracting, how do they act on the bones ? 
What is the result of the contraction of some organs, as the heart 
and blood-vessels ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the muscular system ? CHAPTER V. 
MUSCULAR EXERCISE. 
74. Exercise.—Any kind of muscular movement 
is physical exercise. The term exercise, however, 
is usually applied to the practice of muscular move- 
ments under the control of the will, with the view of 
developing certain parts of the body. The health 
of the body depends largely upon the proper exercise 
of its different parts. 
75. Muscular Exercise and Muscular Contrac- 
tility.—The ability to perform the movements which 
constitute muscular exercise depends upon the property 
of contractility which belongs to muscle. The muscle 
shortens by virtue of its contractility; but the shorten- 
ing cannot continue permanently. The muscle relaxes 
and lengthens again. Shortening and lengthening, or 
contraction and relaxation, follow each other, and thus 
the muscles are exercised. Just as muscular contrac- 
tion may be weak or strong, slow or rapid, simple or 
complicated, so exercise may be greatly varied. 63 
MUSCULAR EXERCISE. 
76. Effect of Exercise on Muscle.—If the mus- 
cles are exercised frequently; in other words, if they 
are made to contract again and again, they increase 
in size and strength. We see illustration of this fact 
in the strong right arm of the blacksmith, and in the 
stout back of the porter. If the muscles are not used 
frequently they become small and weak. This is seen 
in those who from choice or necessity do not lead 
physically active lives. In those who suffer from the 
disease called paralysis the muscles waste away. 
77. Effect of Exercise on the Bones.—Strange 
as it may appear, the bones as well as the muscles 
may be changed in size and form by muscular exer- 
cise. The bones, particularly in early life, will yield 
in various ways to the force exerted by the muscles. 
Here and there on the bones are seen little elevations 
at points where the muscles are inserted. They have 
actually been pulled out little by little by the con- 
tractions of the muscles. Bones are sometimes given 
a twist because the muscles on one side are stronger 
than' those on the opposite side. In time the whole 
bony framework can be strikingly changed by muscu- 
lar exercise. If this exercise is properly regulated, 
the change will be beneficial. 
78. Effect of Exercise on Various Tissues and 
Organs.—Besides muscle and bone, many tissues and 
organs can be favorably influenced by proper mus- 
cular exercise. As has already been shown, the 
tissues and organs are composed of innumerable 
minute bodies called cells, each of which has the 
power of taking from the blood what it needs to 64 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
build up its own kind of tissue. These cells are 
born, die, pass away, and are replaced by others. 
Exercise of any part hastens their decay and death, 
but, at the same time, it gives vigor to the process of 
repair. It calls blood to the part, and new material 
of the best quality takes the place of the worn-out 
particles. The tissue is thus constantly renewed. 
The body is kept fresh and new. While the flow 
of blood is quickened, the organs which pump and 
carry it are strengthened and improved. Breathing 
is largely performed by muscular action, and ex- 
ercise causes the lungs thoroughly to expand and 
contract, and thus to get rid of impure air and replace 
it with that which is fresh and pure. When the brain, 
or thinking organ, is over-worked, muscular exercise 
relieves it by causing the blood to flow to other parts. 
Exercise brings sound sleep by causing a healthful 
fatigue and by calling away excitement from the brain. 
It gives a good appetite by creating a demand for food, 
and at the same time stimulating the organs which 
receive the food and prepare it for the blood. It keeps 
in healthy action the skin and other organs which 
carry off waste matter. 
79. Results of Systematic Exercise.—All mus- 
cular regions of the body can be developed, and even 
the height can be increased, by systematic exercise. 
Under such exercise, directed by Maclaren, author of 
a book on Physical Education, a pupil sixteen years 
old, in one year grew from 5 feet 2f inches in height 
to 5 feet 4f inches, and in weight increased from 108 
to 129 pounds. His girth of chest increased from 31 MUSCULAR EXERCISE. 
65 
to 36 inches; his forearm from 8 to 10 inches, and his 
upper arm from 9| to 11J inches. Many remarkable 
accounts of the value of systematic exercise have been 
published. Bryant, the poet, who lived in the enjoy- 
ment of good health to the great age of eighty-four 
years, was in the habit of rising early every morning, 
and going through a series of exercises designed to 
expand the chest, and call into action all the muscles 
and articulations of the body. He also regularly 
walked to and from his place of business, a distance 
of several miles. 
80. Deformities Prevented or Corrected by Exer- 
cise.—Certain deformities are either the direct result 
of insufficient exercise; or, they could by judicious 
exercise be largely remedied. Rounding or drooping 
shoulders, stooping, spinal curvature and a growing to 
one side, are among these deformities. Pigeon-breast, 
in which the breast-bone is too prominent, with flatness 
of the upper ribs; and hollow-chest, in which the 
breast-bone is sunk in, can both be much improved 
by proper exercise in youth. 
81. Fitness, Variety, and Moderation in Exer- 
cise.—Exercise should be regulated by its special 
fitness for the individual. The work of the strong 
should not be given to the weak. Variety should 
not be overlooked. Such exercises in turn should 
be used as will tell favorably on all parts. Exercise 
should never be carried to the point of fatigue or ex- 
haustion. It should be practised for health and not 
for strength alone. Strength will probably result 
from it, but this should not be the primary object. 66 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
82. Time for Exercise.—About midway between 
the hours for meals is generally the best time for 
active exercise. In exceptional instances, however, 
when the strength fails rapidly between meals, vigor- 
ous exercise is better undergone in from one to two 
hours after taking food. Just before meal-time, when 
the stomach is empty, and the blood needs replenish- 
ing, much exertion may fatigue and depress the 
system. On the other hand, if the muscles be too 
actively exercised just after a meal the work of the 
stomach may be stopped or disturbed. Exercise in 
the early morning before breakfast, when the system 
has been refreshed by sleep, agrees with some people, 
but not with all. The weak and delicate cannot stand 
it unless they have been gradually trained to it. 
83. A Sound Mind in a Sound Body.—Children 
who attend to their plays, games, and exercises, will 
be better fitted for their indoor mental work. Books 
and studies must not be neglected in the hours ap- 
pointed for them. The aim should be to train both 
mental and physical powers so as to insure a sound 
mind in a sound body. 
84. Physical Endurance not Increased by Al- 
cohol.—Alcohol does not enable us to endure either 
short and severe physical efforts or long-continued 
trials of endurance. Men who row, or run races, or 
take part in other athletic contests, do not resort to 
alcoholic stimulants either when in training or at the 
time of their contests. Experience has shown that 
alcohol is worse than useless in such cases. Weston, 
a pedestrian and total abstainer, performed one of the 67 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
most wonderful feats of physical endurance on record. 
He agreed to walk fifty miles a day for one hundred 
consecutive days. He completed the walk success- 
fully with some miles to spare, demonstrating that a 
resort to intoxicating stimulants is not essential to the 
accomplishment of severe and long-continued bodily 
exertion. 
Questions for Review. 
What is physical exercise ? 
To what is the term exercise usually applied ? 
Upon what does the health of the body largely depend ? 
Upon what property does muscular exercise depend? 
Explain how muscles are exercised by virtue of their contractility. 
What effect has frequent exercise on the muscles ? Give illustra- 
tions. 
What is the effect if muscles are not used frequently ? 
In paralysis, what happens to the muscles ? 
What effect has exercise on the bones ? 
What causes some of the elevations seen on bones ? 
How are bones sometimes given a twist to one side ? 
What is said of the effect of exercise on the whole bony frame- 
work? 
Besides muscle and bone, can other tissues and organs be influenced 
by exercise? 
Of what are the tissues and organs composed? 
What power has each cell ? 
What happens to these cells ? 
What is the effect of exercise upon these cells ? 
How does exercise influence the blood ? 
How does it act upon the organs which carry the blood ? 
How is breathing largely performed ? 
What effect has exercise on the lungs and on their supply of air? 
How does exercise relieve the brain? 68 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
How does it bring sound sleep ? 
How does it give a good appetite ? 
What effect has exercise on the skin and other organs which carry 
off waste ? 
What can be accomplished by systematic exercise ? 
Give an illustration from Maclaren. 
What is related of the poet Bryant ? 
What is said of deformities with reference to exercise ? 
Name some of these deformities. 
By what should exercise be regulated ? 
Should exercise be varied, and how ? 
What is said about fatigue and exhaustion from exercise? 
Should exercise be for strength ? 
What is usually the best time for active exercise ? 
When the strength fails rapidly between meals, when is exercise 
better undergone ? 
Why is exercise not good just before a meal? Why not just after 
a meal ? 
What is said about exercise in the early morning ? 
For what will children who exercise be better fitted ? 
Should books and studies be neglected ? 
What should be the aim in education ? 
Is physical endurance increased by the use of alcohol? CHAPTER VI. 
MODES OF EXERCISE 
85. Physical Educational Exercises.—Physical 
educational exercises are those conducted in a system- 
atic way with the view of favoring the growth and 
developing the resources of the body. In ancient 
Greece physical exercises were carried on in schools, 
called gymnasia. The term gymnastics is now fre- 
quently applied to regulated exercises of the body. 
These are usually performed with dumb-bells, clubs, 
weights, wands, bars, rings, ropes, ladders, and similar 
appliances. 
86. Systematic Exercises without Apparatus.— 
Many useful exercises can be performed without any 
apparatus, under a system designed to call out the 
physiological action of the muscles. The term calis- 
thenics, derived from two Greek words, meaning 
“beautiful” and “strength,” is sometimes applied to 
systematic exercise conducted without special appa- 
ratus. In Fig. 20 is a representation of one of the 
positions taken in an exercise of this kind. This 
particular exercise is calculated to develop the chest 
as well as the limbs. 70 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
Fig. 20.—Calisthenic Exercise. 
87. Movements to Promote general Supple- 
ness.— Below is given a series of ten movements in- 
tended to promote general suppleness.* These move- 
ments are a good example of a useful and pleasant 
form of exercise without apparatus. They can be 
readily learned; and, if performed every day, will be 
of great benefit. They can be executed under the 
direction of the teacher, or of some pupil elected to 
the position of “leader.” A wand can be used to beat 
time for the movements. 
Position.— Heels together (as near as the configuration of leg 
will permit); hips thrown back; chest forward; head erect, with 
eyes to front; arms falling easy, with back of hand turned slightly 
to the front. 
Exercise.— Prom this position bring hands to hips; thumbs back. 
Head.—Turn twice to right, twice to left, once to right, twice to 
* Contributed by Miss Mary E. Allen, of the Boston Gymnasium for 
Ladies and Children, to Wide Awake, for October, 1881, in a series of 
Health Papers prepared for this popular magazine for the young. MODES OF EXERCISE. 
71 
left, once to right, back to front; drop hands to side and close to a 
fist. 
Shoulder.— Raise right shoulder as high as possible four times, 
raise left four times, raise right and left alternately four times (left 
going up as right comes down), raise both together four times; drop 
hands to side. 
Arm.— Throw right arm to horizontal at side (hand closed tight) 
four times, throw left four times, throw right and left alternately 
four times, throw both together four times, and bring fingers to 
tip of shoulders, upper arm horizontal, elbow pointing to front. 
Forearm.— Throw right forearm to front on the elbow as a pivot, 
until the whole arm is horizontal (closing the hand at the throw), 
four times, throw left four times, throw right and left alternately 
four times, throw both together four times; and carry arms to side, 
horizontally stretched out, with palms up, and fingers closed into a 
fist. 
Wrist.— Turn right fist up as far as possible four times (elbow 
stiff), turn left up four times, turn right and left up alternately 
four times, turn up together four times; and bring arms to hori- 
zontal stretch, front, palms down, fingers together and closed. 
Hand.— Open right hand and stretch every finger four times, 
open left hand four times, open right and left alternately four times, 
open together four times; and bring hands to hips. 
Trunk.— Turn as far as possible to right (holding trunk firm, 
turning face at same time, heels firmly planted), two times, turn to 
left two times, turn to right once, turn to left two times, turn to 
right once; and back to position. 
Thigh.— Carry right leg across left (crossing left thigh as far up 
and as close as possible, knees stiff) four times, carry left leg across 
right four times, carry right and left across each other alternately 
eight times. 
Leg— Raise right leg as high as possible behind (on the knee as 
a pivot) four times (thigh remaining vertical and firm), raise left 
leg four times, raise right and left alternately eight times. 
Foot.— Raise right foot on heel as high as possible four times, 
raise left four times, raise right and left alternately eight times. 72 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
The Position is very important, and the leader should insist upon 
it before the exercise begins. The body should hold the original 
position, with such changes as are indicated, firmly, so that only 
certain muscles are in use at once; thus, when the arm is used, the 
body should be stiff and firm. 
Head Movements should always be slow, but firm, never with 
sudden force. Hence they are taken on the first beat of a measure 
only, or on 1 when counting 1, 2, 3, 4. All other movements are 
done with a spasmodic action, faster, using every other beat of 2-4 
or 4-4 time, or on 1 and 3, in counting 4 That is, the movement 
is made on 1 and the return to position on 3. This exercise can be 
taken to any even 2-4 or 4-4 time, a pot-pourri of popular airs 
being pleasing, or any polka or quickstep. These movements aid 
in bringing muscles under the control of the will, and promote ease 
and grace of movement; also, as they force the mind and muscles 
to work together, they are a very valuable stimulus to the mental 
faculties; and, if enthusiastically and earnestly carried out, their 
influence will be felt in all mental work. 
88. Gymnastic Apparatus. — Dumb-bells consist 
of two globular masses, with an 
easily - grasped handle between 
them (Fig. 21). Indian clubs 
are bottle-shaped masses of wood, 
the narrow end being shaped as 
a handle (Fig. 22). Dumb-bells 
of about a pound weight are 
sufficient for children under ten 
years of age. For older children 
they may be somewhat heavier. 
The clubs also should be light. 
It is a mistake to use heavy in- 
struments too soon. The dumb- 
bells and Indian clubs are made 
to describe various curves and movements. 
Fig, 21. 
Dumb-Bell. 
Fig. 22. 
Indian Club. MODES OF EXERCISE. 
89. How to Sit and Stand.— Children should early 
learn to sit and stand properly. Health, strength, and 
gracefulness will thus be acquired. The rule should 
be to hold the body as erect as possible both in sitting 
and standing. School-children often acquire bad habits 
of stooping over, or leaning too much to one side, 
while sitting at their desks or standing for recitations 
and other work. In this way they become ungainly, 
and sometimes deformed. An erect position favors 
the free action of the muscles, and also gives the in- 
ternal organs, such as the heart, lungs, stomach, and 
liver, the fullest opportunity to perform their func- 
tions. 
90. Out-Door Exercises.—The most healthful ex- 
ercises are those which can be performed out of doors. 
Such exercises are both profitable and pleasurable. 
They are sometimes called natural exercises. Among 
the most valuable of these are walking, running, swim- 
ming, rowing, and riding. Leaping, climbing, skating, 
sledding, and similar sports, belong to the same class 
of exercises. 
91. Walking.—Walking is an excellent form of 
exercise, developing many important muscles. It is 
chiefly performed by a series Qf complicated move- 
ments of the muscles of the legs; but when one walks 
properly, the muscles of the chest, abdomen, and upper 
limbs are also exercised. In walking, the entire 
weight of the body is supported first by one foot 
and then by the other, and thus each limb enjoys 
alternate rest. The trunk should be held erect, the 
head up, and the shoulders well back, while the arms 74 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
are swung to and fro. The foot should be well lifted, 
and the toes turned outwards. In coming down, the 
heel should first touch the ground lightly, then the 
rest of the foot to the toes, the heel being raised by 
the time the toes are reached. The whole foot should 
not be brought down flat upon the ground at once. 
Shoes should be worn broad enough to give every 
part of the foot its natural play. 
92. Running.—Running is not simply fast walking. 
In running, only one foot is on the ground at a time. 
At some instants both feet are entirely removed from 
the ground. It is really a succession of slight leaps. 
It is a valuable exercise both to train the muscles 
and to give lung-power. 
93. Swimming and Bathing.—Swimming is a 
useful exercise for development, and may prove to be 
a valuable art in time of danger. No real good can 
result, and harm may come, from reckless jumping, 
diving, swimming under water, and similar feats of 
daring sometimes in by swimmers. The 
swimmer should not remain too long in the water; 
from a quarter to half an hour is usually enough. 
Surf-bathing serves to harden and strengthen the 
muscles and other organs. It should be practised 
with caution and moderation. 
94. Rowing.—The labor of rowing should not be 
performed too much by the muscles of the back. 
Those who row much sometimes get strong backs, 
while their chests in front remain hollow, and their 
shoulders become rounded. Arms, trunk, and legs 
should all take part in rowing. The stroke should be MODES OF EXERCISE. 
75 
made by bringing the body to an upright position, 
and even carrying it a little beyond. 
95. Riding.—Horseback-riding brings into use a 
large number of muscles, in checking and guiding 
the movements of the horse and in preserving the 
equilibrium of the rider. It is a refreshing and in- 
vigorating exercise, adding not only to health and 
strength, but also to courage and presence of mind. 
It is not suitable for the weak, nor for invalids, 
who cannot stand the jarring, or who are unable to 
control even the gentlest animal. Those who are not 
strong should use it in moderation at first, and should 
gradually increase the amount and character of the ex- 
ercise. Heavy riding, such as hunting and steeple- 
chasing, is beneficial to the chest and chest muscles; 
but cannot be practised safely except by those who 
are strong. Carriage-riding is a good form of passive 
exercise, giving fresh air, change of scene, and pleasant 
occupation for the mind, but it does not call for suffi- 
cient muscular exertion to make it a means of devel- 
opment. Yelocipede-riding and bicycle-riding have 
recently become popular, and are useful modes of ex- 
ercise if practised in moderation. 
96. Development of Both Sides of the Body by 
Exercise.—The tendency to one-sided development 
was referred to when speaking of the bones. It is 
by exercise that both sides of the body can be given 
an equal chance for development. Defective growth, 
and development of one side, can, with care, be pre- 
vented or remedied. Children should learn to bat, 
to throw, to lift, to use the hammer, etc., with either 76 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
hand. Boys should train themselves to kick a ball 
with one foot as well as with the other. Satchels 
and other burdens should not be carried too much in 
one hand or over one shoulder. Writing and sewing 
should be done with either hand. Whenever one 
limb is found to be weaker or less skilful than the 
other, the former should be exercised and trained 
until the inequality is overcome. 
97. Open-Air Games or Recreative Exercises.— 
Open-air games, such, as foot-ball, cricket, base-ball, 
hand-ball, tennis, jumping the rope, archery, etc., 
are important means of developing the body and 
keeping it strong and well. Wellington is reported 
to have said that England’s soldiers were made on her 
foot-ball fields. In most of our popular games, as 
foot-ball, cricket, and tennis, the lower limbs have 
much the largest share of work. This should be re- 
membered, and attention given to those games, such 
as archery, hand-ball, etc., in which the upper limbs 
take an active part. Gymnastic exercises afford the 
opportunity of developing the parts which are over- 
looked in work and games. 
Questions for Review. 
What are physical educational exercises ? 
What were the ancient Greek schools for physical exercise called? 
What is meant by gymnastics ? 
With what are gymnastic exercises performed? 
Under what system can exercises be performed without apparatus? 
Define and give the derivation of the term calisthenics. 77 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
What are dumb-bells ? What are Indian clubs ? 
Of what weight should dumb-bells and Indian clubs be for chil- 
dren? 
How are dumb-bells and Indian clubs used ? 
How should children sit and stand ? 
What bad habits are often acquired by school-children ? 
What are some of the results of these bad habits ? 
What does an erect position favor ? 
What are the most healthful of all exercises ? 
What are these exercises sometimes called ? Name some of them. 
How is walking chiefly performed ? 
What muscles are exercised when walking is performed properly ? 
In walking, how is the weight of the body supported ? 
How are the different parts of the body held ? 
How should the foot be used ? What sort of shoes should be worn ? 
What is said of the position of the feet in running ? 
What is running in reality ? 
What are trained and developed by running ? 
When may swimming prove to be a valuable art? 
What feats sometimes indulged in by swimmers often lead to 
harm ? 
About how long should a swimmer remain in water? 
How is surf-bathing useful ? How should it be practised ? 
What muscles should not be over-used in rowing ? 
What defects of development are often observed in those who row 
much ? 
What portions of the body should take part in rowing ? 
How should the stroke be made? 
How does horseback-riding bring into use the muscles ? 
What can be said of horseback-riding as an exercise ? 
Is it suitable for the weak ? 
What parts are benefited by heavy riding ? 
By whom alone should it be practised ? 
What is said of carriage-riding, velocipede-riding, bicycle-riding? 
How can both sides of the body be given an equal chance for de- 
velopment ? 
How should children learn to bat, throw, lift, etc.? 
How should a ball be kicked ? 
How should satchels and other burdens be carried ? 
How should writing and sewing be done ? 78 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
How can inequalities of the limbs be overcome ? 
Name some open-air games which are important for health and 
development. 
What is Wellington reported to have said? 
Which limbs have the largest share of work in our popular games ? 
To what games should especial attention be given ? 
How can the parts overlooked in work and games be developed ? CHAPTER VII. 
THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
98. Regulation of the Machinery of the Body.— 
We have seen that the contraction of muscles results 
in the moving of bones and the parts attached to them. 
When the arm is stretched out, or bent upwards, why 
does it not always so remain? Why does not the leg 
always rest in one position ? Why does not the eye 
always look in one direction ? Our arms, and legs, and 
eyes move in this way or in that, because we wish or 
will them so to move. Something within us directs 
and regulates these movements. All machinery must 
be guided and controlled, or it will do harm rather 
than good. In the case of ordinary machines, as loco- 
motives, steam-ploughs, etc., a human being sees that 
the boilers are properly filled with water, that the fires 
are neither too low nor too high, that the belts and 
wheels are well oiled, that the pipes and valves are all 
in proper condition. The machinery of the body, how- 
ever, is regulated by a part of the machine itself. A 
muscle moves because something tells it to move. This 
order must come from somewhere, and must have a road 
by which to travel. It comes from the brain, and jour- 
neys by way of the spinal cord and nerves to the muscle. 80 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
99. The Parts of the Nervous System.—We 
have already learned that some of the bones of the 
head form a case or box, called the skull or cranium, 
and that a long, hollow tube is formed in the backbone, 
and is known as the spinal canal. The skull is filled 
with the organ called the brain, and the spinal canal 
with the spinal cord. The brain and spinal cord are 
connected; they are continuous masses of nervous 
matter. Running oft* from the brain and spinal cord to 
every part of the body are cords, called the nerves. The 
brain, spinal cord, and nerves, with little gray masses of 
nervous matter called ganglia, which are found here and 
there all over the body, make up the nervous system. 
100. Gray and White Matter of the Nervous 
System.—The nervous system is composed of two 
kinds of tissue, usually spoken of as gray matter and 
white matter. The outside of the brain is made up 
chiefly of gray substance, the interior mainly of white. 
The external portions of the spinal cord are composed 
of white matter, the internal of gray. In the brain 
are some isolated masses of gray matter. Ganglia are 
also scattered here and there throughout the body. 
The nerves are formed of white matter. The gray 
substance of the nervous system is its active portion, 
the source of force or power. The white matter is 
made up of fibres or tracts for conveying impressions. 
These fibres transmit the messages which are sent to 
and fro throughout the body. 
101. Divisions of the Brain.—Fig. 28 is a view of 
the left half of the brain. The large mass above, 
which shows many windings upon its surface, is the 81 
THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
cerebrum, or greater brain. It comprises about six- 
sevenths of the entire brain. It conforms to the shape 
of the skull. Its external surface is made up of con- 
volutions and fissures; that is, instead of being one 
uniform, smooth surface, it is composed of a curious 
system of hills and hollows. Underneath the cere- 
brum is a smaller mass, the cut surface of which pre- 
sents a beautiful tree-like appearance. This is the 
cerebellum, or lesser brain. Two parts, called the me- 
dulla oblongata, or oblong marrow, and pons Varolii, 
are also seen in the picture. The medulla oblongata 
is about one inch long. By some it is regarded as the 
uppermost portion of the spinal cord. Pons Varolii 
means the bridge of Yarolius, an Italian anatomist, 
named Yarolius, having first described it. 
Fig. 23.—View of the Left Half of the Brain. 
102. Membranes of the Brain.—The brain is en- 
closed by two coats or membranes. The outer mem- 82 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
brane is called the dura mater, from dura, “ hard,” and 
mater, “ mother.” The name dura was applied to it 
because of its great liardness, or toughness. The term 
mater was given because the ancients had a fanciful 
notion that this membrane was the mother of all the 
other membranes of the body. The inner membrane, 
which is in close contact with the brain, is called the 
pia mater, or “ delicate mother.” Compared with the 
dura mater it is a very thin and delicate. Some 
anatomists speak of a third membrane, which is called 
the arachnoid, from Greek words meaning “resem- 
bling a spider’s web.” It is composed of two layers, 
one on the inside of the dura mater, and the other on 
the outside of the'pia mater. These so-called layers 
of the arachnoid may be considered as parts of the 
other membranes. 
103. Functions of the Brain.—The parts of the 
brain just described have many divisions and subdi- 
visions, each of which probably has its own special 
use or function. The gray matter of the cerebrum is 
the chief organ of the Mind. It is hard to give a 
definition of mind; but we know it is that something 
within us by means of which we become conscious of 
sensations, by which we can fix our attention, and by 
which we can remember, think, judge, reason, and 
govern. We know that the cerebrum is the chief 
organ of mind, because when it is injured, diseased, or 
imperfectly developed, the mind is more or less un- 
sound. Different parts of the cerebrum are probably 
concerned with different functions of the mind. In 
one portion we become aware of sensations of touch, THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
83 
sight, hearing, taste, smell, pain, etc.; in another, at- 
tention, memory, judgment, reason, and other mental 
faculties, are seated; in still another, are centres from 
which go forth the orders or impulses which cause the 
muscles to move. The functions of the cerebellum 
have not been very clearly made out by physiologists. 
One of them seems to be to harmonize movements, 
that is, to cause the muscles to move in a steady and 
regular manner. It has been observed that when the 
cerebellum has been injured or diseased, walking or 
other movements of the limbs became unsteady and 
disorderly. The pons Yarolii serves chiefly to con- 
nect the medulla oblongata with the cerebellum and 
cerebrum. Some important nerves arise in large part 
in its substance. In the medulla oblongata arise the 
nerves which are most essential to life, those which 
go to the face, throat, neck, lungs, heart, and stomach. 
A wound or disease of a very small portion of the 
medulla oblongata will sometimes cause death. 
104. The Spinal Cord.—The spinal cord is con- 
nected with the medulla oblongata above, and extends 
downwards through the cavity or canal in the back- 
bone. It is from fifteen to eighteen inches long, and 
has cracks or fissures running its whole length and 
dividing it into different parts. 
105. The Nerves.—Nerves are given off from the 
brain and from the spinal cord in pairs. These are 
called the cerebrospinal nerves—those coming directly 
from the brain being the cranial nerves, because they 
come from within the cranium or skull, and those 
from the spinal cord being the spinal nerves. (Fig. 24.) 84 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
Fig. 24—A Back View of the Brain and of the Spinal Cord and its Branches. THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
85 
106. The Cranial Nerves, or Nerves' of the Brain. 
—Twelve pairs of nerves go off directly from the base 
of the brain. Figure 25 is a picture of the base of 
Fig. 25.—The Base of the Brain. 
the brain. As here seen, the nerves have been cut off 
before going into the openings in the skull. After 
passing through these holes they send branches off in 
various directions, some to the nose, some to the eyes, 
some to the ears, some to the scalp, forehead, and 
cheeks, some to the mouth, tongue, throat, and neck, 
some to the windpipe, lungs, heart, and stomach, and 
other organs of the abdomen. 86 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
107. The Spinal Nerves.—In the sides of the back- 
bone or spinal column are numerous little holes, 
through which nerves pass to all parts of the trunk 
and limbs. These spinal nerves are connected indi- 
rectly with the brain as well as with the spinal cord. 
This is important to know; otherwise, it may not be 
understood how the brain receives messages from and 
controls all parts of the body. The spinal nerves 
appear to end when they reach the spinal cord; but 
the truth is, that in the spinal cord are tracts or roads 
along which messages can go up from the spinal nerves 
to the brain, and come down from the brain to the 
spinal nerves. 
108. The In-coming and Out-going Nerves.—The 
nerves have been spoken of as if they all went out 
from the brain and spinal 
cord. More properly, some 
come in and some go out. 
In the spinal cord some 
nerve-fibres are running 
upwards, others down- 
wards. Both the out-going and in-coming nerves are 
in the same bundle up to a point near the spinal cord, 
where they divide. The middle part of Fig. 26 gives 
an idea of what would be seen if the spinal cord were 
cut across with a knife. In the central portion are two 
sets of horns. Between and outside of these are spaces, 
which look black in the picture but in reality are white, 
the horns being gray. The nerves, or their continua- 
tions, pass up and down the white parts or columns. 
The gray horns are centres of nerve force. 
Fig. 26.—A Section of the Spinal Cord. THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
87 
109. Sensory and Motor Nerves.—The in-coming 
nerves, those which carry news from all parts of 
the body to the brain, are also called sensory nerves; 
through them the brain gets acquainted with what is 
going on in and around the body. They are the 
nerves which bring about the sensations of touch, 
pain, temperature, etc. The out-going nerves, those 
which carry impulses or messages from the brain to 
all parts of the body, are also called motor nerves, be- 
cause they chiefly go to muscles, and carry orders about 
movements. Each muscle or group of muscles has its 
owu motor nerves. Certain parts of the brain are all 
the time in direct communication with certain muscles. 
Through some kind of an action in the brain, which 
we cannot fully comprehend, it is willed in the brain 
that a muscle shall move. Instantly the message goes 
to that muscle by way of the nerve tract in brain, 
spinal cord, and nerve, and the muscle obediently con- 
tracts. How the message is carried we cannot exactly 
say. Some think that it is simply by a sort of motion 
conveyed along the little molecules of the nerve tissue. 
It certainly is mysterious, and yet not much more so 
than the sending of messages along telegraph wires. 
110. Reflex Action of the Spinal Cord and Brain. 
—Every movement performed by muscles is not di- 
rected by the brain. Sometimes muscular actions 
occur without the will or mind seeming to have 
anything to do with them. If your foot is tickled 
while you are asleep, you may draw it up without 
awaking. Here the mind does not seem to act, at 
least not in the ordinary way. Such a movement 88 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
is called a reflex action. The term reflex is de- 
rived from words meaning “to flow back again.” 
Impressions are taken up by the sensory nerves, the 
ends of which are in the skin, and are carried by these 
nerves to nerve-centres in the gray horns of the spinal 
cord. From these centres they are reflected or thrown 
back along a motor nerve or nerves to the muscles of 
the foot and leg, and movement is the result. The 
brain is asleep and off guard, and does not take any 
note of such actions. Some reflex actions, such as 
coughing, sneezing, winking, etc., are performed 
through the brain. Walking, standing, piano-play- 
ing, and similar actions are also sometimes accom- 
plished in a reflex manner, that is, without the inter- 
position of the will. 
111. The Sympathetic System of Nerves.—One 
set of nerves and ganglia found in the body is usually 
called the sympathetic system of nerves. One part of 
this system consists of a chain of gray ganglia, joined 
by a long cord, and situated on each side of the front 
of the spinal column in the neck, chest, abdomen, and 
pelvis. On or near the great organs, which are in the 
large cavities of the trunk, are networks of nerves and 
ganglia which belong to this system. Scattered here 
and there in little nooks and corners of the skull are also 
some of its ganglia. The different parts of the system 
are all connected, and are also united with the spinal 
cord or brain. 
112. Physiology of the Sympathetic System of 
Nerves.—Nerves which go to blood-vessels are called 
vaso-motor nerves. Yaso-motor nerves are found in THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
89 
all parts of the nervous system. They come some- 
times directly from the brain and spinal cord, without 
getting mixed with the sympathetic system. Many 
of them, however, pass to the blood-vessels by way 
of the sympathetic ganglia. Blood-vessels have mus- 
cular tissue in their walls. The messages which 
travel along the vaso-motor nerves to the vessels cause 
them sometimes to contract or squeeze together, some- 
times to dilate or become wider. In this way the 
supply of blood to different parts of the body, and 
particularly to the internal organs, is largely regulated 
through the sympathetic system. 
113. Effect of Alcohol on the Brain and its 
Membranes.—The brain and its membranes are sup- 
plied with blood-vessels in the greatest abundance. 
Any substance absorbed into the blood soon penetrates 
to every nook and corner of the brain, upon which it 
acts with intensity. Congestions of the brain are 
thus caused by the temporary use of alcohol. Its 
long-continued use leads to changes in the substance 
of the brain, which degenerates and often hardens. 
The inner membrane of the brain, or pia mater, as 
the result of frequent congestions, loses its clearness, 
and becomes milky-white or amber-colored. Both this 
membrane and the outer membrane, or dura mater, 
may become thickened. Some authorities say that a 
brain once thoroughly overcome by alcohol is never 
again what it was before. Dr. Percy, a British phy- 
sician,* injected two ounces and a half of alcohol into 
the stomach of a dog, which caused its almost instant 
* Quoted by Parton. 90 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
death. He removed the animal’s brain, subjected it 
to distillation, and obtained a surprising quantity of 
alcohol, which seemed to have rushed to the brain. 
114. Different Stages in the Action of Alcohol 
on the Nervous System.—Dr. Richardson describes 
the acute effects of excessive amounts of alcohol as 
occurring in four stages. (1.) The first stage is one 
of excitement—the face flushes, the eye brightens, and 
conversation becomes louder and freer. This effect 
is due to the impairment of the nervous control, the 
result of the alcohol. The heart beats more rapidly, 
because the resistance offered by the capillary blood- 
vessels to the current of blood is diminished. (2.) In 
the second stage, the function of the spinal cord is 
influenced. The spinal centres control pure automatic 
acts—those acts which proceed systematically, even 
when we are not thinking about them. These now 
cease to be correctly carried on. The movements of 
the individual become uncertain and unsteady. The 
nervous control of certain of the muscles is lost, and 
the nervous stimulus is more or less enfeebled. (3.) In 
the third stage, the cerebral or brain centres become 
influenced; they are reduced in power, and the con- 
trolling influences of will and of judgment are lost. 
The reason is now off* duty, or is fooling with duty, 
and all the mere animal instincts and sentiments are 
laid bare. The coward shows up more craven, the 
braggart more boastful, the cruel more merciless, the 
untruthful more false, the carnal more degraded. 
(4.) Finally, in the fourth stage, the action of the alcohol 
still extending, the superior brain centres are over- TUE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
91 
powered; the senses are beclouded, the voluntary 
muscular prostration is perfected, sensibility is lost, 
and the body lies a mere log, dead by all but one-fourth, 
on which alone its life hangs. The heart still remains 
true to its duty, and while it just lives it feeds the 
breathing power. 
115. Nervous Derangements produced by Alco- 
hol.—Epileptic convulsions, some forms of paralysis, 
and neuralgias, or painful affections of the nerves, are 
sometimes attributable to alcohol. Hysteria is fre- 
quent among those who use alcohol, although it is 
more frequently produced by other causes. Such 
patients suffer from great emotional excitement, laugh- 
ing or crying by turns, may have violent spasms, are 
exceedingly sensitive and irritable, and generally be- 
come a nuisance to themselves and others. Alcohol 
may also cause sleeplessness. It does this largely by 
the unhealthy state of the circulation which it induces. 
116. Effect of Tobacco on the Nervous System. 
—Tobacco keeps the nervous system in a continual 
state of irritability and weakness, and causes a craving 
for itself which sometimes amounts to a kind of mental 
disorder. Through the sympathetic nervous system 
tobacco acts on the glandular system, exciting over- 
secretion followed by an impaired secreting power. 92 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
Questions for Review. 
What results from the contraction of muscles ? 
Why do our arms, legs, and eyes move in certain directions ? 
What directs and regulates these movements ? 
Why must machinery be guided and controlled ? 
How are ordinary machines managed? 
By what is the machinery of the body regulated? 
Why does a muscle move ? 
Whence comes the order to move, and by what road does it travel ? 
Where is the brain situated ? 
Where is the spinal cord situated ? 
What are the nerves ? 
What parts make up the nervous system ? 
Of what two kinds of tissue is the nervous system composed ? 
Where is the gray matter of the brain found ? 
Where is the white matter found ? 
Of what are the external portions of the spinal cord composed? 
Of what are the internal parts composed ? 
What isolated masses are found in the brain ? 
Where are ganglia found ? 
Of what kind of tissue are the nerves formed ? 
What portion of the nervous system is the source of force or power ? 
What portion conveys impressions or messages ? 
What is the greater brain called? 
How much of the entire brain does it comprise ? 
To what shape does it conform ? 
What are seen upon its external surface? 
What is situated underneath the cerebrum ? 
What is the length of the medulla oblongata ? 
How do some regard the medulla oblongata ? 
What is the meaning of pons Varolii? 
How many coats or membranes has the brain ? 
What is the outer membrane called? 
Why were the terms “ dura ’’ and “mater” applied to it? 
What is the inner membrane called ? 
What is the characteristic of this membrane ? 
What third membrane is sometimes spoken of by anatomists ? 
What is the derivation of the word arachnoid ? 
Of what layers is it composed ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
93 
Of what may these so-called layers of the arachnoid be considered 
as parts ? 
What is the chief organ of the mind ? 
What is the mind? 
How do we know that the cerebrum is the chief organ of the mind ? 
With what are different parts of the cerebrum concerned ? 
Of what sensations do we become aware in one portion ? 
What faculties are seated in another part ? 
What centres are located in still another region ? 
What seems to be one of the functions of the cerebellum ? 
What has been observed when the cerebellum has been injured or 
diseased? 
What purpose does the pons Varolii serve? 
What arise in its substance? 
What nerves arise in the medulla oblongata ? 
What would be the effect of a wound or disease of a very small 
portion of the medulla oblongata? 
How long is the spinal cord ? 
How is the spinal cord divided? 
How are nerves given off from the brain and spinal cord? 
What is meant by the cerebro-spinal nerves ? 
Which are the cranial nerves? 
Which are the spinal nerves ? 
How many pairs of nerves go off from the brain ? 
To what do the cranial nerves send branches? 
Through what do the spinal nerves pass ? 
With what are the spinal nerves indirectly connected? 
What tracts or roads are found in the spinal cord ? 
Do all the nerves go out from the brain and spinal cord ? 
In what direction do the nerve-fibres in the spinal cord run ? 
Up to what point are the out-going and in-coming nerves together ? 
What is situated in the central portion of the spinal cord ? 
Where are the white columns of the cord situated ? 
What is the function of the gray horns ? 
By what name are the in-coming nerves known? 
Why are they so called ? 
What is brought about by them ? 
What are the functions of the out going nerves? 
What are they sometimes called, and why ? 
With what is each muscle or group of muscles supplied? 94 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
With what are certain parts of the hrain in direct communication ? 
Explain the process by which the brain causes the muscle to con- 
tract. 
How are messages probably conveyed along the nerve tracts ? 
Are all movements performed by muscles directed by the brain ? 
Give illustrations of movements occurring without the control of 
the will or mind. 
What is a movement which occurs independently of the will or 
mind called ? 
Give the derivation of the term reflex. 
Explain the process by which reflex actions take place. 
Mention some reflex actions performed through the brain. 
What set of nerves and ganglia is found in the body ? 
Of what does one part of the sympathetic system of nerves consist ? 
Describe the other portions of the sympathetic system. 
With what is the sympathetic system connected? 
What are vaso-motor nerves, and where are they found? 
How do many of these nerves pass to the blood-vessels? 
What sort of tissue is found in the walls of blood-vessels? 
How is the supply of blood to different parts of the body largely 
regulated ? 
Describe the manner in which congestion of the hrain is caused by 
the temporary use of alcohol. 
What changes result in the brain and its membranes from the con- 
tinued use of alcohol ? 
What do some authorities say of a brain once thoroughly over- 
come by alcohol ? 
Describe the experiments of Dr. Percy. 
Describe the first stage of the effect of excessive amounts of alco- 
hol on the nervous system; the second, the third, the fourth. 
Name some of the nervous derangements caused by the use of al- 
cohol. 
Describe the effect of tobacco on the nervous system. CHAPTER VIII. 
SENSATION AND THE SPECIAL SENSES 
117. Sensation.—An impression made npon any 
part of the body to such an extent that the mind rec- 
ognizes that something has been done, is a sensation. 
Through the nervous system impressions are received 
and given out, and we are put in communication with 
other beings and objects. If, for instance, we are struck, 
tickled, pinched, rubbed, cut, or burned, we have sen- 
sations of sticking, tickling, pinching, etc.; if we see a 
tree we have a sensation of sight; if we hear a voice or 
music we have a sensation of sound. For all sensations 
the individual must have (1) an apparatus to receive 
impressions, that is, sense-organs in the skin, eye, ear, 
etc.; (2) an apparatus to carry impressions to the brain, 
the in-coming or sensory nerves spoken of in the last 
chapter; and (3) an apparatus in the brain to convert 
the impressions into what becomes sensation to the 
mind. When the skin is touched, when light strikes 
the eye, or a sound the ear, when the tongue comes 
in contact with anything sweet, or the nose is greeted 
with an odor, sense-organs receive the impressions, and 
sensory nerve-tracts carry them to the brain, where 
we become conscious of a sensation. 96 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
118. The Five Special Senses.—The five special 
senses are feeling, seeing, hearing, tasting, and smell- 
ing. These are the five ways or channels by which 
the mind becomes acquainted with the outside world. 
Sometimes all or several of the senses act; sometimes 
only one is brought into service. We hear an apple 
fall, we look in the direction of the sound and see it, 
we touch it, picking it up, we smell its fragrance, and 
finally we taste it. Each and all of the senses have 
given some information about the apple. The blind 
man uses touch alone when he feels a piece of cloth 
to determine what it is. 
119. Feeling or Touch.—The skin is the great 
organ of the sense of touch. Immense numbers of 
nerve filaments are found in the true skin. The ends 
of these take up impressions which arise from contact 
of the skin with any object. These impressions finally 
get into the brain as sensations of touch. By this 
sense of touch we learn whether bodies are hot or 
cold, rough or smooth, wet or dry. In some parts of 
the body, in the fingers and hands, for instance, the 
sense of touch is very delicate. If the skin is burned, 
pain is caused. The reason of this is that the nerves, 
which usually are only slightly excited by touch, are 
greatly excited by contact causing pain. When the 
skin comes in contact with a hot or cold body a pecu- 
liar sensation is caused, which some think is entirely 
distinct from touch. When a weight is raised, the 
sensation seems also to be not altogether one of touch. 
120. The Media or Clear Parts of the Eye.—The 
organ of sight is the eye. Cutting through the mid- SENSATION AND THE SPECIAL SENSES. 
97 
die of the eyeball from above downwards, and from 
before backwards, we get the appearance seen in Fig. 
27. Going from before backwards, we first see the 
Optic Nerve. 
Pig. 27. — Section of the Eyeball. 
clear part of the eye, or cornea, what is sometimes 
called, but wrongly, the “ sight of the eye.” The word 
cornea comes from cornu, “ a horn,” and this part of 
the eye is so called because it bears some resemblance 
to very thin horn. Next comes a little room or cavity, 
the front or anterior chamber, which contains a fluid 
known as the aqueous or watery humor. Hanging in 
this chamber is a circular curtain, the iris, which has 
a hole in it called the pupil. The word iris means 
“ rainbow ; ” it is this curtain which gives the eye its 
peculiar color. The iris contains muscular fibres, 
which contract and expand, and so alter the size of 
the pupil. In bright light the pupil is small, in the 
dark it is large; and thus the amount of light ad- 
mitted to the eye is regulated. Just behind the iris 
we come to a hard body, the crystalline lens, which is 98 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
perfectly clear, and has two sides curved outwards. 
Back of this lens is the posterior chamber of the eye, 
which is filled with a jelly-like mass, called the vit- 
reous or glassy humor. The cornea, aqueous humor, 
pupil, crystalline lens, and vitreous humor are the 
media of the eye, placed between the outside light and 
the nerve of sight. 
121. The Coats or Coverings of the Eye.—Be- 
sides the cornea in the front of the eye, this organ has 
three distinct coats or coverings. The outer protect- 
ing one is the sclerotic or hard coat; it forms, so far 
as it is visible, the “ white of the eye.” To this the 
muscles of the eyeball are attached. The middle coat 
is called the choroid, a word which means “ like the 
skin; ” it is like the true skin in that it contains a 
great number of blood-vessels. It is a very dark 
membrane, containing many pigment or paint cells. 
The object of these dark cells is to absorb some of 
the rays of light. If all the rays of light which 
strike the eyeball were allowed to enter the eye, and 
affect the nerve of sight, vision,would be dazzled and 
confused. The third, inner coat of the eye is the 
retina. The word rete means a “ net,” and the retina 
has been compared to a network spread out over the 
inner surface of the eye. It is the sensitive, nervous 
coat of the eye. 
122. The Nerve of Sight.—On page 85 is a picture 
of the base of the brain, to which attention was called 
in the last chapter. Near the front of this picture 
two tracts of nerve tissue can be seen crossing each 
other, somewhat like the letter X. These are the SENSATION AND THE SPECIAL SENSES. 
99 
optic nerves, or nerves of sight, forming at this point 
what is called the optic chiasm or commissure. Chiasm 
comes from a Greek verb, which means “ to make the 
letter X;” and commissure signifies “a joining to- 
gether ; ” and hence it can be seen why these names 
are given. Back of the place of crossing one of these 
nerve tracts goes to one side of the brain, while the 
other passes to the opposite side; in front of the 
chiasm one nerve proceeds through an opening in one 
of the bones of the head to the right eye, the other 
goes to the left. The nerve passes through the two 
outer coats of the eye, and becomes continuous with 
the inner coat or retina. 
123. The Bending of Light in the Eye.—When 
light passes from one clear substance to another of 
different density, it is bent from the straight course 
which it has been taking. These clear substances will 
cause more or less bending of the rays of light accord- 
ing to their shape. A curved surface will cause a 
very considerable bending. A piece of glass with a 
double curve, like that of the crystalline lens, has a 
very decided refracting power. It will bend rays of 
light to a point. When rays of light come to the eye 
they strike first upon the curved cornea, which bends 
them a little from their course. After awhile they 
reach the crystalline lens, which bends them very de- 
cidedly ; so much so as actually to cause the rays to 
fall upon the retina in such a way as to produce an 
image upside down. 
124. Pictures upon the Retina.—When the pho- 
tographer takes a picture he places his subject before 100 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
a box, with a hole in the front part of it. This is 
what is called the camera obscura, or dark chamber; 
it is coated or painted inside with some dark sub- 
stance. At the end next to the person who is being 
photographed is an opening, containing a lens. At 
the other end is a piece of glass coated with a chemical 
substance, on which light acts very quickly. The 
rays of light coming from the subject strike the lens, 
and are bent by it in such a way that they fall right 
upon the chemical substance, and form there a picture. 
The eye may be compared to a camera obscura. The 
retina has, during life, a red color, due to a peculiar 
coloring matter, which is called retinal red. It is 
probably a chemical substance of extreme delicacy 
and sensitiveness, on which light waves from different 
objects, or objects of different colors, so act as to give 
rise to different changes in it. According to the kind 
of change effected will be the impression made on the 
nerve-ends, and conveyed back to the brain. 
125. The Process of Seeing.—Rays of light pass 
through the beautifully clear media of the eye and 
through the pupil; they are bent by the crystalline 
lens so that they fall directly upon the retina. They 
cause a picture of the object from which they come 
to be made upon the retina. They produce a stir in 
the retina. They probably set up in it some kind of 
minute motion. We commonly say that light makes 
an impression on the retina. This stir, or motion, or 
impression, travels from the retina back along the optic 
nerves to the brain; and in the brain, in some way not 
fully understood, it becomes the sensation of sight, and 
the object is seen right side upwards. 101 
SENSATION AND THE SPECIAL SENSES. 
126. The Organ of Hearing.—Only second to sight 
in importance is the sense of hearing. The organ of 
hearing is the ear, of which you have a view (Fig. 28). 
It consists of three parts, the external ear, the middle 
ear, and the internal ear. The external ear includes 
the projecting and curiously curved part commonly 
called the ear and the little tube or canal, the external 
auditory canal, which can be seen extending inwards 
from the outside. This canal is about one inch long. 
At its inner end it is closed by a membrane called the 
membrane of the tympanum. The middle ear is a little 
cavity just inside of this membrane. This cavity is 
called the tympanum or drum. A canal or tube about 
one and a half inches long runs from this middle ear or 
tympanum to the throat. It is called the Eustachian 
tube, after an anatomist, Eustachius, who first described 
it. Both the Eustachian tube and middle ear are lined 
with delicate mucous membrane. The internal ear is 
Fig. 28.—View of the Ear. 102 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
also called the labyrinth, because of its complex char- 
acter. This internal ear or labyrinth is made up of 
curiously shaped canals and cavities in the bones. 
127. The Nerve of Hearing.—The auditory nerve, 
or nerve of hearing, is one of the nerves given off di- 
rectly from the brain. It proceeds from the base of 
the brain by bony passages to the internal ear, in the 
cavities and canals of which it is distributed, ending 
in minute plates and liair-like filaments. This ner- 
Transmission of Sound. 
vous portion of the organ of hearing is bathed all the 
time in a fluid which is within the labyrinth. 
128. The Process of Hearing.—A sound like that 
of a voice, a bell, or a cannon sets the air around into 
vibration. This vibration is carried as a wave of sound 
to the external ear. It passes into the external audi- 
tor}'- canal, and strikes against the membrane of the 
tympanum, which is also made to vibrate. These vi- 
brations are communicated to little bones within the SENSATION AND TEE SPECIAL SENSES. 
103 
ear, by which they are carried along to the labyrinth 
or internal ear. The liquid in the labyrinth, and 
finally the little nerve ends, take up the motion, which 
is conveyed along the trunk of the auditory nerve to 
the brain and becomes there the sensation of hearing. 
This is the usual process. Sound, however, instead 
of coming through the external canal of the ear, may 
reach the labyrinth by the bones of the head. If a 
watch is placed against the forehead, or against the 
teeth, its ticking can be heard very distinctly, the 
sound being carried by way of the bones of the head 
to the internal ear. 
129. Taste.—If salt, sugar, vinegar, or a bitter med- 
icine is placed on the tongue, it produces a peculiar 
sensation—it is tasted, for the tongue is the organ of 
taste. The tongue is supplied by two nerves, branches 
from one going to the front, and from the other to the 
back part of the organ. Impressions are carried by 
one or both of these nerves to the brain. The mucous 
membrane which covers the tongue is raised into little 
points or papilla3, and to these go little nerve filaments 
and blood-vessels. Through these points impressions 
of taste and other impressions also are received. 
130. Smell.—The sense of smell is brought about 
by an arrangement very similar to that for the other 
senses. The nose, as has already been learned, is lined 
with mucous membrane. At the front part of the 
base of the brain are the nerves of smell, or olfactory 
nerves, one on each side. They are of large size 
and club-shaped (Fig. 25). From these nerves of 
smell a large number of little nerve branches go down 104 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
through minute holes in the floor of the skull to the 
mucous membrane which lines the nostrils and the 
cavities connected with them. This membrane, like 
the tongue, has scattered all over it little papilla? or 
projections, in which the delicate nerve-branches end, 
or, perhaps, more properly, begin. Odors carried by 
the air enter the nose, act upon the nerve-ends, and 
the impressions made are hurried back to the great 
nerves of smell in the brain, and the sensation of smell 
results. 
131. Effect of Alcohol on the Eye.—Alcohol, 
used as a drink, often produces chronic congestion or 
inflammation of the eye and delicate lining membrane 
of the lid. A disease well known to physicians, called 
Amblyopia potatorum, or “feebleness of sight of drink- 
ers,” often results. In this condition, if drink is per- 
sisted in, nutritive and structural changes take place 
in the eye, and the optic nerve, which conducts to the 
brain the impressions formed on the retina, wastes 
away, and the case is hopeless. 
132. Effect of Tobacco on Sight and Hearing.— 
In moderate smokers, the sight is often perplexed; 
in reading, letters become confused, luminous specks 
float before the eyes, and deep-seated pain is felt in 
them. The best evidence that tobacco is acting in- 
juriously on the sense of sight is supplied when there 
is a long retention of images after the eye ceases look- 
ing at objects. This indicates that the retina, or ner- 
vous screen, is becoming affected. The specific effect 
of smoking on the sense of hearing is indicated by a QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
105 
confusion of sounds, with a difficulty in appreciating 
sounds that are very soft or unusually loud. 
133. Effect of Tobacco on the Lips, Tongue, 
and Teeth.—Cancer of the lips or tongue has not 
unfrequently been attributed to smoking. A recent 
writer* in a journal devoted to dentistry has shown 
that the constant use of tobacco injures the teeth, 
which is contrary to an old view, and one which is 
even now commonly accepted. According to this 
writer, the injurious effects are not very noticeable 
until the person has been using the weed for about 
fifteen years, but the use of the pipe to excess will 
show its injurious effects in less time. 
Questions for Review. 
What are the functions of the nervous system ? 
What is a sensation ? Give illustrations. 
What three things are necessary in order that sensations may be 
produced ? 
Give illustrations of the forms of apparatus for sensations. 
What are the five special senses ? 
What are the functions of these senses ? 
How many of the senses may act at one time ? 
Give an illustration of the action of all the senses. 
Give an illustration of the use of only one sense. 
What is the organ of the sense of touch ? 
What are found in the true skin ? 
How are sensations of touch brought about through the nerves of 
the skin ? 
Of what do we learn by the sense of touch? 
* John D. Harper, D.D.S., in the Southern Dental Journal for Jan- 
uary, 1883. 106 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
Where is the sense of touch very delicate ? 
Explain the difference between the sensation of touch and that of 
pain. 
What results when the skin is touched by a hot or cold body ? 
What results when a weight is raised ? 
What is the organ of sight ? 
What is the cornea? Why is it so called? 
What is the name of the little room or cavity in the front of the eye ? 
What fluid does the anterior chamber of the eye contain ? 
What curtain hangs in this chamber ? 
What is the pupil of the eye ? 
What is the meaning of the word “ iris”? 
What does the iris give to the eye? What does the iris contaib? 
How is the admission of light to the eye regulated ? 
Where is the crystalline lens ? Describe it. 
Where is the posterior chamber of the eye ? What does it contain ? 
What are the media of the eye ? 
How many coats or coverings has the eye ? 
What is the outer coat of the eye called ? 
What does this coat form and what are attached to it? 
What is the middle coat of the eye called ? Why ? 
What does the choroid coat contain ? 
What is the object of the dark cells of the choroid? 
What is the inner coat of the eye' called? Why? 
What is the function of the retina ? 
Where do the optic nerves cross ? 
What is the meaning of the words chiasm and commissure ? 
What is the course of the optic nerve tracts behind the chiasm ? 
With what coat of the eye is the optic nerve continuous? 
What happens to a ray of light when it passes from one clear sub- 
stance to another ? 
What is the effect of a curved surface ? What of a double curve 
like that of the crystalline lens ? 
Describe the course of rays of light after reaching the eye. 
Describe a camera obscura. 
To what is the red color of the retina during life due ? 
What is the probable nature of retinal red? How does it act? 
Describe the process of seeing. 
What is the organ of hearing ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
107 
Of wKat three parts does the ear consist? 
What does the external ear include ? 
- What is the membrane of the tympanum ? 
What is the middle ear ? What is its cavity called ? 
What tube runs from the middle ear to the throat ? 
With what are the Eustachian tube and middle ear lined? 
What is the internal ear also called ? Why ? 
Of what is the internal ear or labyrinth composed ? 
What is the name of the nerve of hearing? 
Where does the nerve of hearing originate? Describe its course. 
In what is the nervous portion of the organ of hearing bathed? 
Describe the usual process of hearing. 
Instead of coming through the external auditory canal, in what 
other way may sound reach the internal ear ? Give an illustration. 
What is the organ of taste ? 
What nerve branches are found in the tongue? 
What are their functions ? 
What are the papillae of the tongue? 
How is the sense of smell brought about ? 
With what is the nose lined ? 
Where are the nerves of smell situated and what are they called ? 
Describe the course of the branches of the nerves of smell. 
Describe the process of smelling. 
Describe the effect of alcohol on the eye. 
How does tobacco affect the sight ? 
How does tobacco affect the hearing ? 
What effect has tobacco on the lips, tongue, and teeth ? CHAPTER IX. 
CARE OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM AND 
SENSE ORGANS. 
134:. Importance of Caring for the Nervous Sys- 
tem.—The importance of carefully guarding the 
nervous system is very evident. The brain, being the 
governing part of the body, must be kept in good 
health, or the machinery of the system, which it di- 
rects, will be allowed to jangle and get out of tune. 
The spinal cord, along which some of the messages to 
and from the brain centres are carried, and which 
contains centres of its own, must also be sound, or 
the performance of its functions will not be properly 
effected. The sensory nerves must not be broken or 
injured, or impressions will not be conveyed smoothly 
upwards to the spinal cord and brain. The motor 
nerves must be intact in order to receive and convey 
the messages from the brain as they are sent. 
135. Exercise of the Brain.—As the brain is the 
chief organ of the mind, its regular exercise will 
improve the mental powers. Much can be done in 
childhood towards establishing good habits of mind. 
Careful training of the senses will help in this direc- CARE OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
109 
tion, as our knowledge really comes from sensations. 
Even the higher faculties of the mind, such as atten- 
tion, will, memory, and judgment, are improved by 
exercise of the brain. Children sometimes seem to 
look without seeing, and to listen without hearing; 
they should learn to observe closely and attend to 
what they observe. In reading, they should try to 
understand clearly every word and thought. Study 
will improve the mind, and will not injure the body, 
if proper care is taken to preserve the health by regu- 
lar habits of eating, sleeping, exercise, and recreation. 
Mental labor must not be carried to excess. 
136. Causes of Disease of the Brain and Nervous 
System.—Alcoholic drinks, such as whiskey, brandy, 
gin, wine, beer, ale, etc., as has already been shown, 
are often the cause of serious diseases of the nervous 
system. We have seen that when large quantities of 
alcohol are taken in a short time, drunkenness is pro- 
duced, chiefly through its effects upon the brain. If 
its use is continued, the faculties of the mind become 
impaired. Sometimes the tissues and the vessels of 
the brain become so altered that they cannot properly 
perform their functions. Continued care, anxiety, or 
excitement will also have a tendency to weaken and 
depress the brain. Prolonged exposure to the sun, or 
to excessive heat, with fatigue, is also a cause of dis- 
ease of this organ. 
137. Paralysis.—A condition known as paralysis, 
or palsy, is sometimes the result of disease or injury 
of some part of the nervous system. The term pa- 
ralysis comes from a Greek word meaning to “ loosen” 110 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
or “disable.” It is an affection characterized by a 
loss or diminution of power. The arm that is com- 
pletely paralyzed cannot be lifted from the side; the 
palsied leg will drag like a dead weight. The mus- 
cles no longer act as they do in health. The disease 
or injury which causes the paralysis may be situated 
in the brain, in the spinal cord, or in the nerves. A 
vessel may break in the brain, causing a blood-clot to 
form, and this clot destroys the centres which govern 
and direct muscular movements. The spinal cord 
may be crushed, or may be diseased, so that messages 
cannot travel up and down it, or so that its centres 
cannot act, and spinal paralysis results. Disease or 
injury of a nerve causes paralysis by cutting off com- 
munication between the muscles and the brain or 
spinal cord. When the serious nature of paralysis 
is considered, the importance of carefully guarding 
the nervous system from harm and overstrain will 
be recognized. 
138. Sleep.—Sleep lias well been called “tired na- 
ture’s sweet restorer.” Without sleep the brain would 
soon wear out. The work and turmoil of the day 
keep the brain in a state of constant activity. Wear 
and waste always go hand in hand with activity; hence, 
the brain becomes exhausted. Sleep helps to renew 
and rebuild. During sleep the voluntary muscles are 
at rest, and breathing, circulation, and temperature 
are diminished. About eight hours out of the twenty- 
four is the proper allowance of sleep for most adults. 
Children, and those who are weakly or hard-worked, 
will generally require more than eight hours. CARE OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
139. Defects of Sight.—Two of the most common 
defects of vision are short-sight and long-sight, which 
are generally due to a faulty shape of the eyeball. 
In short-sight, or near-sightedness, the globe of the 
eye is too long, and rays of light are bent to a focus 
in front of the retina. Objects can then only be 
seen clearly when they are close to the eye. Concave 
glasses are employed to correct this defect. In long- 
sight, or far-sightedness, the globe of the eye is too 
short, and hence rays of light from an object at an 
ordinary distance come to a focus behind the retina. 
Convex glasses must be used. Sometimes, instead of 
the eyeball being simply too long or too short, it is 
irregular in shape. Glasses made with special curva- 
tures in different directions are then necessary. The 
eye can be adjusted to see near or distant objects by 
what is called the function of accommodation, which 
is performed by the crystalline lens, the curvature of 
this body increasing or diminishing. As age advances, 
however, the lens becomes less elastic and its curva- 
ture cannot well be increased, so that convex glasses 
are also required for this condition. 
140. How to Preserve Good Sight.—The sight 
often becomes poor because the eyes are sadly abused, 
especially in childhood and youth. Near-sightedness, 
in particular, which is said to be rapidly increasing in 
all civilized countries, is frequently acquired during 
school-life. At home and at school every precaution 
should be taken to counteract the injurious effects of 
protracted use of the eyes at a near point, as, in 
reading, writing, drawing, sewing, and similar work. 112 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
Study-rooms should be well lighted. The light should 
be abundant, steady, and not glaring, and should en- 
ter from the left side. Desks should be inclined, so 
as not to compel the pupil to bend over too much 
when at work. School-books should be printed in 
large, clear type, and the pages should not be too 
broad. Whenever defective vision is suspected, the 
eye should at once be examined. If the condition of 
the sight was determined before entering school, much 
misery in after life would often be saved. 
141. Color-Blindness.—A peculiar defect of sight 
is called color-blindness. Usually, those who are color- 
blind are not able to distinguish between certain 
colors. The most frequent form of color-blindness is 
that for red; that for green comes next in frequency; 
rarely that for blue will be found. The term “ Dal- 
tonism ” is applied to color-blindness, after Dalton, a 
famous English chemist, who was red-blind, and was 
the first to call scientific attention to the subject, de- 
scribing his own case in 1794. Children should be 
taught early to attend to colors. The color-sense can 
be improved by training, and sometimes the defect is 
apparent rather than real. 
14-2. Care of the Ears.—The ears, like the eyes, 
should be watched and guarded. They are often in- 
jured by introducing too much.cold water, and by bor- 
ing and working at them. The ears can be cleaned 
with a soft, dry towel, or with a little warm water. The 
introduction of solid instruments, such as pins, probes, 
and ear-spoons, may injure the auditory canal, or even 
the drum of the ear. The ear may be injured even CARE OF THE NER VO US SYSTEM. 
113 
by probing it roughly with the finger. If a foreign 
body gets into the ear, it can usually best be removed 
by gentle, steady syringing with warm water. When- 
ever the hearing is affected, when noises are heard in 
the ears, or when a discharge from this organ is no- 
ticed, a physician should be called. 
143. Cultivation of the Senses.—All of the senses 
can be improved by cultivation. Great delicacy of 
touch can be acquired by practice, as is seen in musi- 
cians, sculptors, mechanics, and sometimes to a re- 
markable extent among the blind. A girl, named 
Laura Bridgman, through severe sickness occurring 
in her infancy, lost sight, hearing, taste, and smell; 
but she was taught to write, and to read and talk 
with her fingers, learning more with her one sense 
of touch than some do with all their senses. The eye 
can be trained to see farther and better. The hearing 
can be improved by listening carefully, and trying to 
distinguish different sounds. The Indian, who de- 
pends so largely on his senses, usually has acute sight 
and hearing. Persons with “musical ears” can tell 
the slightest differences in notes. Even taste and 
smell can be improved by cultivation. If the senses 
are the inlets or channels by which knowledge enters 
the mind, those who cultivate most thoroughly each 
and all of them will, in the end, have acquired the 
most knowledge. 
144. Sleep Produced by Alcohol and other 
Narcotics. — While alcohol will sometimes cause 
wakefulness and unrest, in other cases, particularly if 
taken in large quantities, it produces heavy, stupor- 114 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
ous sleep. This sleep, however, is not of the kind 
that restores “tired nature.” Instead of arousing 
from “alcoholie sleep” refreshed and strengthened, 
the individual awakens with disordered digestion 
and headache, and in a state of nervous irritability. 
His sleep is not that which comes naturally as the 
result of physiological fatigue, but is due rather to 
the action of a deadening agent introduced into the 
blood upon the nerve centres. The sleep produced 
by alcohol, or other drugs, such as opium and chloral, 
is never as beneficial as that which comes in the 
natural way. In serious disease, physicians are some- 
times compelled to resort to narcotics to produce 
sleep, but this is only done in extreme cases, and with 
great caution. No one should ever use such narcotics 
except on trustworthy medical advice. The habit of 
using either alcohol or other narcotics to induce sleep 
is fraught with danger to body and mind. 
Questions for Review. 
Why should the brain he kept in good health ? 
Why should the spinal cord be sound? 
Why must the sensory nerves not be broken or injured ? 
Why must the motor nerves be intact? 
What will be the effect of regular exercise of the brain on the 
mental powers ? 
When can much be done towards establishing good habits of mind ? 
What is said of careful training of the senses? 
What is said of the higher faculties of the mind ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
115 
How should children learn to observe ? 
How should they read ? 
What effect will study have upon the mind and body ? , 
What diseases are often caused by alcoholic drinks ? 
How is drunkenness produced ? 
What effect has alcohol on the tissues and vessels of the brain ? 
Name some other causes of diseases of the nervous system. 
From what is the term paralysis derived? 
By what is it characterized ? 
Give some illustrations of forms of paralysis. 
Where may the disease or injury which causes the paralysis be 
situated ? 
Give an example of the manner in which paralysis may be caused 
by brain disease. 
How is spinal paralysis produced ? 
How does disease or injury of a nerve cause paralysis ? 
What does the serious nature of paralysis teach ? 
What has sleep been called ? 
What would be the effect of going without sleep ? 
What organs are at rest and what functions are diminished during 
sleep ? 
What is the proper amount of sleep for most adults ? 
How much sleep do children and the weakly or hard-worked re- 
quire? 
What are two of the most common defects of vision ? 
To what are they frequently due ? 
What is the condition in short-sight ? 
What kind of glasses is employed to correct short-sight? 
What is the condition in long-sight ? 
What kind of glasses are used to correct this defect ? 
What other defect of the eyeball besides its being too long or too 
short is sometimes found ? 
How is this defect corrected ? 
How is the crystalline lens adjusted to see near or distant objects ? 
What effects has age on the function of accommodation ? 
What kind of glasses is required to correct the defect of sight 
which results from advancing years ? 
How does sight often become defective ? 
When is near-sightedness frequently acquired ? 
What precaution should be taken with reference to the eyes ? 116 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
How should study-rooms be lighted ? 
How should desks be inclined ? Why ? 
How should school-books be printed ? 
What should be done when defective vision is suspected ? 
What should be done before entering school ? 
What is color-blindness ? 
What is the most frequent form of color-blindness? 
What is the origin of the term “ Daltonism”? 
What is said about teaching children to attend to colors ? 
How are the ears often injured ? 
How can the ears be cleaned ? 
Should solid instruments be introduced into the ear? 
What course should be taken when any serious affection of the ear 
is present? 
Can the senses be improved by cultivation ? Give illustrations. 
Who in the end will have acquired the most knowledge ? 
What effect has alcohol in relation to sleep ? 
When only should narcotics be used ? CHAPTER X. 
THE BLOOD. 
145. What Blood Is.—The blood of living man 
is a red, warm fluid. It has been well called the vital 
or life-giving fluid. Good blood in proper quantity 
usually means good health. It is found almost every- 
where in the body; only a few tissues, such as the 
nails and hair, will not bleed when stuck or cut. 
Blood cannot be seen coursing along in the human 
body, even in rosy cheeks, where much of it is near 
the surface. In order to study it in a living animal, 
however, physiologists sometimes look at the web of 
a frog’s foot, which is very thin and contains many 
blood-vessels. 
146. Quantity of Blood in the Living Body.—The 
quantity of blood in the human body is about one- 
thirteenth or one-fourteenth of the weight of the body. 
If a man weighs one hundred and fifty-six pounds, 
about twelve pounds of this weight will be blood. 
About one-fourth of this blood is distributed in the 
heart, lungs, large arteries, and veins; one-fourth in 
the liver; one.fourth m the muscles; and one-fourth 
in other organs. 118 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
147. Composition of the Blood.—When blood 
first flows, it appears to the naked eye like a perfectly 
simple red fluid. It is not, however, as simple in com- 
position as it appears, as can be learned by looking at 
a drop of blood under the microscope. It will then 
be seen to be made up of a solid and a liquid portion. 
The liquid, which is colorless, is called plasma; the 
solid part is composed of corpuscles. These corpus- 
cles, or “ little bodies,” are of two kinds—the red cor- 
puscles and the white corpuscles. In Fig. 29 is a view 
Fig, 29— Red and White Corpuscles of the Blood Magnified. 
of some of the appearances presented by these cor- 
puscles, red and white. 
148. The Red Corpuscles.—The red corpuscles 
are flat, circular disks, dimpled on each side like a THE BLOOD. 
119 
shirt-button. In the figure are views of them look- 
ing at them in front and edgeways. They have a 
curious fashion of sometimes sticking together like a 
roll of pennies, as is also shown. A single red corpus- 
cle really looks yellowish; but when many of them 
are seen together they look red. They give to the 
blood its red color. The blood has been compared to 
a stream of water filled with an immense number of 
very little red fishes, the red corpuscles. One drop of 
blood may contain as many as a million. 
149. The White Corpuscles.—The white cor- 
puscles are somewhat larger than the red. They are 
usually globular. They will, however, even while 
one is looking at them with the microscope, change 
their shape several times—one moment being globu- 
lar, the next pear-shaped, the next three-cornered, 
and so on. They are colorless, and are less numerous 
than the red corpuscles, healthy blood containing only 
one white corpuscle to about four or five hundred red. 
It is supposed that the white corpuscles become in 
time changed into the red. When the proportion of 
white corpuscles to red is much increased, a serious 
disease is the result. 
150. Clotting or Coagulation.—If fresh blood is 
put into a bowl, it soon becomes like jelly. If it is 
left standing for some hours, it will separate into two 
parts—one a red, solid mass, the clot, and the other a 
clear liquid, which is called serum. The whole proc- 
ess is spoken of as clotting or coagulation. In the 
plasma, or liquid part of blood, a substance called 
fibrin forms. This is made up of very delicate 120 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
threads or filaments. These run in all directions like 
an extremely fine net-work. The corpuscles get 
caught in this net-work, and in this way the clot is 
formed. The serum is the plasma with its fibrin 
removed; the clot is equivalent to the corpuscles 
with fibrin added. It is not yet known exactly where 
the fibrin, which plays such an important part in clot- 
ting, originates. It forms in the blood after it has 
left the body. It has been thought probable that it 
is in part, at least, made out of the white corpuscles 
breaking in pieces. 
151. Clotting of Blood in the Living Body.—In 
health, blood does not clot in the living body. It is 
fortunate that this is the case. The smallest islet of 
flesh becomes barren and dead without its supply of 
blood. If a vessel should be stopped by a clot, the 
parts to which the vessel goes would not receive this 
supply. This clotting sometimes occurs in grave dis- 
eases. Clotting sometimes serves a useful purpose 
when blood-vessels are cut or otherwise injured. The 
bleeding is checked by the clots plugging the open 
mouths of the vessels. 
152. Composition of Serum.—Even the serum, or 
liquid part of the blood which separates from the clot, 
is not a simple fluid. It contains more than water. 
It is largely made up of albumen, the same substance 
that is found in the white of egg. This albumen is 
composed of the four great elements carbon, hydro- 
gen, nitrogen, and oxygen, sometimes called albumin- 
oids. Albumen, and substances like it, are found here 
find there all over the body, Our food, out of whicl\ THE BLOOD. 
121 
the blood is made, contains also the albuminoid ele- 
ments. Vegetables are largely made up of oxygen, 
hydrogen, and carbon; while most animal food con- 
tains all these, and nitrogen in addition. Some parts 
of vegetables, however, contain all four elements, and 
the fat of animals is composed only of the oxygen, 
hydrogen, and carbon. The serum of the blood can 
be dried, and it will then readily burn. The part 
which burns is chiefly albumen ; and in burning, this 
substance gives rise to carbonic acid, water, and am- 
monia. Carbonic acid contains carbon and oxygen; 
water contains hydrogen and oxygen; and ammonia 
contains nitrogen and hydrogen. In burning, the 
albumen breaks up into its different elements, some 
of which unite with oxygen from the air, and, as 
stated, carbonic acid, water, and ammonia are formed. 
Albumen is, as the chemists would say, a body which 
can be burned or oxidized. 
153. Composition of Fibrin.—Fibrin is a sub- 
stance very similar in composition to albumen, al- 
though the two are not identical. It is an albuminoid; 
like albumen, it is composed of carbon, hydrogen, 
nitrogen, and oxygen. Fibrin, albumen, and other 
albuminoids, largely make up the important tissues of 
the body, muscle, nerve, gland, etc. 
154. Water of the Blood.—In one hundred parts 
of serum about ninety parts are water; and in one 
hundred parts of wet corpuscles about fifty-six or fifty- 
seven parts are water. The entire blood contains 
nearly eighty per cept. of water. It is “ thicker than 
Yfater” chiefly because of th§ immense numbers 122 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
corpuscles which it contains; although the solid mat- 
ters dissolved in the plasma also help to render it 
thicker and heavier. 
155. Mineral Substances in the Blood.—In addi- 
tion to the corpuscles, the fibrin, the albumen, and 
the water, the blood also contains minute quantities 
of minerals or salts. When blood is dried and then 
burned, a small amount of ash will always be left. 
This ash, if examined carefully, will be found to con- 
tain numerous mineral substances, the most important 
of them being iron, potassium, sodium, calcium, chlo- 
rine, sulphur, and phosphorus. These substances, 
although present in such very small quantities, are 
essential to healthy blood. 
156. Uses of the Blood.—The feeding of the tis- 
sues of the body is carried on chiefly by the fluid part 
of the blood. The tissues take nutritive material from 
the blood, and the blood itself is fed from the food 
taken into the stomach. This blood builds bone and 
brain, liver and lungs, marrow and muscle; from it 
are derived bile, tears, saliva, and other secretions. 
Even the vessels which carry the blood are made from 
it. It supplies each tissue with the kind of material 
it needs. It carries oxygen to every part which re- 
quires oxygen. The blood also collects the waste 
matters of the body and conveys them to the organs 
which cast them out. 
157. Effect of Alcohol on the Blood and Blood- 
Vessels.—Alcohol disturbs the normal action of the 
different constituents of the blood. The flow of 123 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
blood through the arteries is regulated through the 
sympathetic system of nerves, which is not under the 
influence of the will. Alcohol paralyzes the centres 
which govern these nerves, and the vessels to which 
they go, become over-dilated. In confirmed drinkers 
a chronic dilatation often remains, and is shown by the 
persistent redness of the face, and especially of the 
nose. The blood-vessels, particularly the arteries, 
are liable to disease from the abuse of drink. Some- 
times an artery becomes quite rigid; its elasticity 
and its power of expansion and contraction are de- 
stroyed. These changes throw more work on the 
heart, and cause it to degenerate in structure. Dr. 
Parkes calculated that the free consumption of alco- 
holic liquors easily added twenty per cent, of addi- 
tional work to the heart’s normal task. The heart is 
excited and spurred to a rapid, unnatural gait. 
Questions for Review. 
What is blood ? What has it been called ? 
Where is it found? 
How do physiologists study blood in a living animal? 
To what is the quantity of blood in the body equal? 
How is this blood distributed ? 
Of what two portions is the blood composed ? 
What are the two kinds of corpuscles called? 
Describe the red corpuscles. 
In what manner do the red corpuscles often come together ? 
What is the color of a single red corpuscle ? 
To what has the blood been compared? 124 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
How many red corpuscles rnay one drop of blood contain ? 
How do the white corpuscles compare in size with the red? 
What is the shape of the white corpuscles ? 
What is said about the white corpuscles changing shape ? 
What is said about their color ? 
How do the white corpuscles compare in number with the red ? 
What becomes of the white corpuscles ? 
What is the result when the white corpuscles increase out of pro- 
portion to the red ? 
What happens if fresh blood be allowed to stand in a bowl? 
Into what two parts does the blood separate ? 
What is the process of separation called ? 
What substance is found in the plasma, or liquid part of blood? 
Describe the process by which a clot is formed. 
To what is the serum equivalent? 
To what is the clot equivalent ? 
What is known about the origin of fibrin ? 
Does blood clot in the healthy living body ? 
What would happen if blood clotted in the living body ? 
What useful purpose is sometimes served by clotting ? 
Of what is serum largely composed ? 
Of what elements is albumen composed ? 
What are these elements sometimes called ? 
Where is albumen found ? 
Does the food contain albuminoid elements ? 
Of what are vegetables largely composed ? 
What does animal food contain ? 
What is said of drying and burning serum ? 
What substance chiefly burns ? 
In burning, to what does albumen give rise ? 
What is the composition of carbonic acid, of water, and of am- 
monia? 
How would the chemists describe albumen ? 
What is fibrin ? Of what is it composed ? 
What are largely made up by the fibrin, albumen, and other 
albuminoids ? 
What is the proportion of water in serum ? 
What is the proportion of water in wet corpuscles ? 
What is the per cent, of water in the entire blood? 
What makes "thicker than 'water"? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
125 
What is contained in the ash of blood ? 
How are the tissues fed ? 
How is the blood fed ? 
Name some of the uses of the blood. 
What is collected by the blood ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the blood and blood-vessels ? CHAPTER XI. 
THE CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD. 
158. Machinery for Distributing the Blood.— 
As the blood builds every tissue, the body must have 
machinery to distribute this blood. The heart is the 
pump which propels, and the blood-vessels are the pipes 
which convey, the red fluid of life to every little parti- 
cle of tissue. The blood is constantly travelling round 
and round to every part of the system. This journey 
of the blood through the body is called the circulation, 
the word circulate meaning to “move round.” In 
ancient times it was said that “ all roads led to Rome,” 
because Rome was the centre of the world’s activities 
In like manner, in regard to the circulation, all roads 
lead to the heart. The roads by which the blood travels 
are blood-vessels of three kinds, called arteries and 
capillaries. The blood goes out of the heart and finds 
its way through these vessels back to the heart again. 
159. The Heart.—The heart (Figs. 30,81)isahollow 
organ, situated in a space in the chest between the two 
lungs. It is conical in shape, its pointed end, or apex, 
hanging downwards. Its usual weight is ten to twelve 
ounces. It is not a single chamber or cavity. It is di- 
vided, in the first place, from above downwards into a THE CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD. 
127 
right and left half; and then each of these halves is again 
subdivided into an upper 
and lower cavity. If 
the head is placed on 
the left side of the chest, 
a peculiar double sound, or 
rather two sounds, some- 
thing like lubb dup, lubb 
dup, can be heard. To 
hear these sounds best, 
the listening ear should 
be about on a level with 
the fifth rib, or over the 
space between the fifth 
and sixth ribs, and a lit- 
tle to the left of the 
breast-bone. These are 
the sounds of the heart, 
which is ceaselessly working. 
Fig. 30. 
The Heart and Large Blood-vessels. 
160. Valves of the Heart.—The word valve comes 
from a Latin word which means “ folding-doors.” A 
valve is usually a little lid or door of some kind, so 
made as to permit a fluid to pass in one direction, but 
not to come back. In the common pump is a valve 
which allows the water to come up, and then closes to 
prevent its return, so that i* is compelled to flow out 
of the spout. Between the upper and lower cavities 
on each side of the heart, and also between the lower 
cavities and the vessels which go out from them, are 
valves, which allow the blood to flow forward, but 
prevent it getting back again, so that the circulation 
is kept up steadily in one direction. 128 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
161. Arteries.—The term artery comes from Greek 
words meaning “ to contain air.” The ancients be- 
lieved that the arteries were air-tubes, because they 
usually found them empty after death. The first and 
largest of the arteries is given off directly from the 
Fig. 31—A View of the Chest, Showing the Heart, the Lungs, and the Large 
Blood-vessels. 
left lower cavity of the heart. It is called the aorta, 
from Greek words meaning to “ support,” because it is 
supported or suspended from the heart. It goes up 
from the heart, makes a great curve from right to 
left, and then descends through the trunk in front of THE CIRCULATION OF TIIE BLOOD. 
129 
the backbone. It sends off branches to all parts of 
the body. In Fig. 82 is a view of the aorta and 
some of its branches. The first 
of these go to the organs in the 
chest, abdomen, and pelvis. A 
large artery goes to each leg, 
dividing and subdividing until 
the toes are reached. Each arm 
is supplied with a main artery 
also, which divides at the elbow 
into two branches, and these 
subdivide again and again down 
to the very finger-tips. In Fig. 
38 is a view of the arteries of 
the arm and forearm and their 
subdivisions. If the ends of the 
fingers are placed along the front 
of the wrist, near its thumb 
side, a steady beat will be felt. 
This is the impulse of the 
blood in an artery. It is the 
“ pulse ” which the doctor feels. 
On the temples this impulse can 
also be made out. It could be 
felt in hundreds of places, if 
the blood-vessels were not so 
covered by the tissues. A large 
artery goes up each side of the 
neck, and this has an internal 
branch which passes through a hole in the skull to the 
brain, and an external branch which supplies the neck 
and face, as shown in Fig. 34. 
Fig. 32. 
The Aorta and its Branches. 130 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
162. The Veins.—The vessels which bring the 
blood back to the heart are called 
veins, the Latin vena meaning a 
“ pulse,” or “ vein.” The arteries 
begin in one great vessel, the aorta; 
the veins end in two great vessels, 
both of which open into the right 
upper chamber of the heart. Veins, 
like arteries, are found in all parts 
of the body. Instead of starting as 
large vessels, like the arteries, they 
begin as minute tubes, and come 
together to form larger and larger 
trunks. They have thinner walls 
than the arteries. The veins have 
valves, like little watch-pockets, 
along their inner walls. They open 
the way the blood travels (Fig. 35). 
Their mouths are always towards 
the heart. 
163. The Capillaries.—Arte- 
ries do not open into veins, nor 
veins into arteries; but commu- 
nication between them is made 
by another set of very fine vessels, 
the capillaries, from the Latin capil- 
lus, a hair. All the arteries of the body may be 
said to end, and all the veins to begin, in these capil- 
laries. 
164. Contractions of the Heart.—The heart is a 
muscular organ, and it is the property of a muscle to 
Fig. 33. 
Arteries of the Forearm. THE CIRCULATION OF TIIE BLOOD. 
131 
contract. The muscular fibres which compose the 
walls of the heart run in various directions around 
its cavities. W hen these fibres contract, they squeeze 
together the heart-walls. If a hollow India-rubber 
ball, with a hole in it, is filled with water, and is 
firmly grasped and twisted in the hand, the water 
Fig. 34—The Arteries of the Head and Face. 
will be driven out through the opening. The hand 
and fingers contain many muscles, and it is through 
their contractions that the force which expels the 
water is exerted. During the passage of blood 
through the heart, a series of squeezings or contrac- 
tions takes place. 132 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
165. Description of the Coarse of the Circulation. 
—All the blood from the capillaries of the 
body is collected by veinlets and veins, and is 
carried to the upper cavity of the right side 
of the heart. As soon as this cavity is full, its 
walls begin to contract, and the blood within 
is squeezed through the valve into the lower 
cavity of the same side. The valve between 
the two cavities is composed of little flaps, 
and, as the blood fills the lower cavity, it 
gets behind these flaps and pushes them 
shut. From the right lower cavity of the 
heart a large vessel, called the pulmonary 
or lung artery, goes out and sends branches 
to both lungs. Where this artery begins, 
the opening is guarded also by a valve. The walls 
of the heart-cavity squeeze together, and the blood 
rushes forward into the artery, and is prevented 
by the valve from reflowing. Carried by the pul- 
monary artery and its branches, the blood is distrib- 
uted to millions of capillaries in the lungs. From 
these it passes into pulmonary or lung veins, the 
largest of which finally convey it to the upper of the 
two cavities of the left side of the heart. The journey 
through the left heart is very much like that through 
the right. The upper cavity contracts and forces the red 
stream onward through a valve into the lower. This 
left lower cavity next contracts. The blood cannot flow 
back, so it pushes forward with a great wave into the 
aorta, the opening into which is also guarded by a valve. 
On and on the blood travels until the capillaries of all 
parts, of the body, except the lungs, are reached. 
Fig. 35.-A 
Veil Open- 
ed so as to 
Show the 
Valves in 
Parts. 133 
THE CIRCULATION OF TIIE BLOOD. 
166. The Circulation through the Liver.—The 
liver is supplied with blood for its nourishment by 
branches of the aorta. In addition, the blood which 
circulates in the stomach, intestines, and some other 
organs, is collected by a large vein and carried into 
the liver. The liver acts upon the blood, so as to 
render it better fitted for the uses of the body. It 
is thought that the liver destroys a poisonous mate- 
rial which forms in the blood in other parts of the sys- 
tem. The liver also manufactures sugar to be used by 
the system. After the blood has been changed in the 
liver, it is collected by veins and conveyed to the right 
side of the heart. 
167. The Spleen. —The spleen, a dark, red organ, 
about five inches long, and weighing about six or seven 
ounces, is situated to the left of the stomach. It has 
no ducts or canals. Its exact functions are not known. 
168. How the Tissues are Supplied by the 
Blood.—The walls of the capillaries are very thin. 
Everywhere these capillaries surround little islets o'f 
tissue. Nutritive materials from the blood soak 
through the thin walls of the capillaries into these 
little islets. If a bladder containing water, in which 
sugar has been dissolved, is placed in a vessel of pure 
water, the water in the vessel after a short time will 
taste of the sugar. The dissolved sugar has passed 
through the membrane. In a similar way materials 
pass out of the blood into the tissues. 
169. Effect of Alcohol on the Heart.—The ac- 
tion of the heart is governed or regulated by a nerve- 134 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
centre or centres. When the governing region is in 
a healthy condition, the heart has a certain stroke and 
rhythm, by virtue of which it does its work of pump- 
ing the blood to all parts of the body in a quiet, uni- 
form way. Alcohol exerts a paralyzing influence on 
these nerve-centres. The heart is no longer health- 
fully controlled, because the centres have lost their 
tone. Under these circumstances, the heart has been 
compared to a steam-engine without a governor—its 
action is quickened for a time. Soon it becomes 
feeble from overwork. 
170. Effect of Alcohol on the Liver.—When 
alcohol has been taken into the stomach and absorbed, 
it passes almost directly to the liver. A'arious affec- 
tions of the liver are caused by the abuse of alcohol. 
Sometimes it is congested and enlarged. In the course 
of time it may become fatty, or shrunken and hard- 
ened. The liver of the confirmed drinker is probably 
never free from the influence of the poison; it is too 
often saturated with it. The prolonged use of alco- 
holic drinks is the most frequent cause of cirrhosis of 
the liver—a form of chronic inflammation of this 
organ of the most serious character. So frequently is 
this disease dependent upon the irritant action of 
alcohol, that it is commonly known as “gin-drinker’s 
liver,” especially among English physicians. The 
term “ cirrhosis” comes from a Greek word meaning 
“ yellow,” the cirrhotic liver often having a yellowish 
appearance. 
171. Effect of Tobacco on the Heart.—While 135 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
tobacco does not directly produce organic disease of 
the heart or other parts of the circulatory system, it 
renders the blood unnaturally fluid; it injures the red 
blood corpuscles, and disturbs the action of the heart 
and of the arteries. 
Questions for Review. 
What propels the blood ? 
What conveys it to the tissues ? 
What is the journey of the blood through the body called? 
What are the three kinds of blood-vessels ? 
What is the heart ? 
Where is it situated ? 
What is its usual weight ? 
Into how many cavities is it divided ? 
Describe the sounds of the heart. 
Where are these sounds best heard ? 
From what is the word valve derived? 
What is a valve ? Give an example of a valve. 
What valves are found in the heart ? 
From what is the term artery derived? 
Where is the first and largest artery ? 
Why is it called the aorta ? 
Describe the course of the aorta. 
To what organs do the first branches of the aorta go ? 
How are the legs and arms supplied with arteries? 
Where can the impulse of the blood in an artery be felt most 
readily ? 
At what other points can it be felt ? 
Why cannot the pulse be felt in hundreds of places where arteries 
are found ? 
Describe the course of the arteries which go to the brain, neck, 
and face. 
What are the vessels which bring the blood back to the heart 
called? 136 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
How do the veins end ? How do they begin and increase ? 
How do their walls compare with those of the arteries ? 
Describe the valves of the veins. 
What are the capillaries ? 
Of what sort of tissue is the heart composed ? 
How do the muscular fibres of the heart run ? 
What is the effect of the contraction of these fibres ? 
Illustrate by a hollow India-rubber ball the method in which mus- 
cular action causes fluid to be expelled from a cavity. 
What takes place during the passage of blood through the heart ? 
How is the blood from the capillaries of the body collected ? 
To what cavity of the heart is the blood carried by the veins ? 
Describe the journey of the blood through the right side of the 
heart. 
What large vessel goes out from the right lower cavity of the heart 
to the lungs? 
How is the opening of this vessel guarded ? 
Describe the distribution of the blood to the capillaries of the 
lungs; 
Into what does the blood pass from the capillaries of the lungs ? 
To what cavity of the heart do the pulmonary veins convey the 
blood ? 
Describe the journey of the blood through the left side of the 
heart and the general system. 
How is the liver supplied with blood for its nourishment? 
What is done by the portal vein? 
What are some of the functions of the liver ? 
What becomes of the blood after it has been changed in the liver ? 
What is the spleen ? Where is it situated ? 
What is known-about its functions? 
Describe the manner in which nutritive materials get into the 
tissues from the capillaries. 
Illustrate by a bladder containing water in which sugar has been 
dissolved. 
What is the effect of alcohol on the heart? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the liver? 
What is the effect of tobacco on the heart ? CHAPTER XII. 
FOOD. 
172. Why we Eat .—A witty writer has said that 
some people eat to live and others live to eat. It is 
certain that unless we eat we cannot live. Our tissues 
are constantly wasting, because every part of the body 
is constantly at work. Walking, writing, breathing, 
thinking, lead to waste. This waste must be made 
good by what we eat and drink, by what we take into 
the system. We eat that we may make blood, and 
from the blood each part of the body takes something 
to keep it alive and growing. What we eat does not 
go at once into the blood; it must first be got ready. 
It is true that doctors sometimes throw medicine, 
liquid food, or even fresh blood itself, directly into a 
patient’s blood; but this is something unusual and 
unnatural, and it is only done in extreme sickness, 
and when food cannot be taken in ordinary ways. 
173. Food.—Anything which goes to nourish the 
body, which is used to make good its wear and waste, 
is food. It might be said that food is anything we 
eat or drink, were it not that we sometimes take 
substances into our mouths and stomachs which are 138 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
not food; and some, indeed, which do more harm than 
good to the body. Eggs, milk, meat, bread, sugar, 
butter, salt, and water are well-known articles which 
contain the essentials of a real food; on them one 
could live, grow, and develop. 
174. Digestion.—Digestion must be performed be- 
fore food, of whatever kind it may be, becomes blood. 
The word digestion means the act of dissolving or 
separating into parts. It is a process of breaking up 
and changing the food until it gets just right for the 
blood. 
175. The Different Classes of Food-Stuffs.— 
We have learned that albumen, of which the serum 
of the blood is mainly composed, contains the four 
great elements, carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, and oxygen; 
and also that the food which makes the blood, and the 
tissues and organs of the body, are largely formed of 
these elements. Foods, or food-stuffs, are of different 
kinds, according to the proportions or arrangement of 
these elements. Nitrogenous food-stuffs contain these 
four elements; but they are most important because of 
their nitrogen. They are the only forms of food which 
contain nitrogen. They are sometimes called albu- 
minoids, because of the albumen which abounds in 
them. The best examples of nitrogenous food are found 
in lean meat, eggs, and milk. Sugars and starches, 
which constitute another class of food-stuffs, contain 
carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, with a large proportion 
of the last. Sugar is chiefly obtained from fruits and 
vegetables, but sometimes comes from the animal world, 
as when obtained from honey and milk. Starch is abun- 139 
FOOD. 
dant in such food as wheat, corn, rye, rice and pota- 
toes. Fats and oils, a third kind of food, also contain 
carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, but comparatively 
little of the last. They also are derived both from 
the animal and vegetable world; for example, the fat 
of meats, of butter, and of milk from the animal 
kingdom; from the vegetable, olive oil, palm oil, and 
cocoa butter. Mineral substances, such as common 
salt, lime, and iron, form a necessary part of food, 
although they are not needed in large quantities. 
Our chief drink, water, is one of the most important 
articles of food. It makes up the greater part of 
the weight and bulk of the body. 
176. Remarks on the Different Kinds of Food.— 
Food-stuffs get into the blood after undergoing cer- 
tain changes. Our food should contain different 
articles in proper proportion. Milk, and food prepared 
from it, are among the best articles of diet, because 
milk contains every one of the different classes of 
food,—nitrogenous, sugary, fatty, and mineral, and a 
good supply of water. It is usually easy of digestion. 
If compelled to live on a single article, milk would 
be the best. The term “flesh-food” is sometimes 
applied to the different kinds of meat—beef, mutton, 
pork, fowl, fish, etc. These, like eggs, abound in nitro- 
genous material. Breads supply us with plenty of 
sugary and starchy matters. They, however, contain 
also gluten, which is a form of nitrogenous or albu- 
minous food. The potato is composed of water, starch, 
and a little albumen. Fruits are largely made up of 
water and sugar, and are useful as food, as well as 140 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
agreeable to the taste. What is called a “mixed 
diet” is the best. Body and mind are kept in the best 
condition by using both animal and vegetable food. 
177. Quantity of Food Required.—The quantity 
of food required to maintain health varies greatly ac- 
cording to certain circumstances, such as age, activity, 
season, and climate. The young need more than the 
old. Those who are active, who work hard either 
physically or mentally, require a large supply of good 
food. In cold weather and cold climates more food, 
and of a stronger quality, is needed than in warm 
seasons and hot climates. Animal food should not 
be taken oftener than twice daily. The amount of 
animal and vegetable food combined, should not ex- 
ceed thirty ounces in the twenty-four hours ; and for 
the majority of persons an average of twenty-four 
ounces of mixed solid food, a third only of which 
should be animal, is sufficient. The amount of fluid 
taken in any form should not exceed the average of 
twenty-four ounces daily.* 
178. Cooking.—Good cooking is of great impor- 
tance. The best food may be rendered almost worth- 
less by bad preparation. Articles are cooked to fit 
them for digestion and improve them in taste. Some- 
times cooking is necessary to make food safe. A 
minute worm called the trichina spiralis) or “spiral 
hair-like worm,” sometimes is present in different 
forms of pork, and in beef. If the pork or beef is 
eaten raw or underdone, this worm may get into the 
human body and produce a painful disease. 
* B. W. Richardson’s “ Diseases of Modern Life.” FOOD. 
141 
179. When and How to Eat.— Persons in ordi- 
nary health should eat at regular intervals. Three 
meals a day, from five to six hours apart, should be 
taken. Eating between meals should be avoided. 
The stomach needs to rest between its efforts at 
digestion. We should eat slowly, carefully chewing 
solid food. We should be cheerful while eating. 
The brain and the stomach cannot both be worked 
hard at the same time without injury to one or the 
other; therefore, we should not think deeply, nor allow 
our minds to be excited, while eating. Pleasant con- 
versation assists digestion. The old saying that one 
should leave the table feeling hungry is not true; 
but, on the other hand, we should not eat until we are 
uncomfortable. A disease known as dyspepsia, which 
means “difficult digestion,” is usually caused by errors 
of diet—by taking food at irregular hours, or of im- 
proper quality or quantity, or by not devoting suffi- 
cient time to eating and drinking. 
180. Drinks.—Tea, coffee, and cocoa, when prop- 
erly used, are admirable drinks and very serviceable, 
particularly for grown people. They soothe and stim- 
ulate the nervous system, and prevent the tissues 
from wasting too rapidly. They should not be taken 
in excess. One cup of each a day is enough. Alco- 
holic drinks, such as wine, ale, beer, brandy, and 
whiskey,should never be used as common drinks. Used 
as medicine, when the system is much reduced by dis- 
ease or by accident, they may be of service, but they 
should be used only when directed by physicians. 
181. Pure Water.—Of all drinks, pure water is the 142 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
best. By pure water we mean water free from in- 
jurious impurities. Absolutely pure water is not 
found in nature, but can be obtained by carefully con- 
densing steam. Rain-water, where it falls in the 
country, is a good example of a soft and comparatively 
pure water. If water is acted upon by sewer-gas, or 
receives foul matters of any kind, it becomes a source 
of disease. Water obtained from lakes or rivers 
should be carefully filtered before being used. 
182. Alcohol not Food.—Food is that which is 
capable of supplying material or tissue, or that which 
produces heat or some other form of force. Such food 
as bread, meat, and potatoes, is taken into the stomach, 
and is digested and transformed into both tissues and 
force; it renews and builds the body, and helps to 
give strength and energy. The Esquimaux, or the 
Arctic explorer, eats large quantities of fat, and yet 
does not become fat himself. The fat is a producer 
of heat and force. It is a sort of fuel to the body, 
which is burned up to maintain the bodily heat. It is 
conceded that alcohol is not a food out of which tissues 
are built; and many chemists and physiologists hold 
that it is not even a heat-producer. 
183. Alcohol and Food Contrasted.—Dr. Lees 
strongly contrasts the effects of alcohol and of food as 
follows: “Food is digested; alcohol is not. Food 
warms the body directly or indirectly; alcohol lowers 
the temperature. Food nourishes the body; alcohol 
does not. Food makes blood ; alcohol never does any- 
thing more innocent than mixing with it. Food feeds QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
143 
the blood-cells; alcohol destroys them. In health, 
food excites to normal action only; alcohol tends to 
inflammation and disease. Food gives force to the 
body; alcohol excites reaction and weakens force. 
Questions for Review. 
Why are the tissues of the body constantly wasting ? 
How is this waste made good ? 
Why do we eat? 
What must take place before what we eat gets into the blood ? 
Are substances ever introduced directly into the blood ? 
Give illustrations. 
Define the word food. 
Why do we not define food as anything that we eat or drink ? 
Name some well-known articles which contain the essentials of a 
real food. 
What is the'meaning of the word digestion? 
What is the process of digestion ? 
What four elements does the albumen of the blood contain ? 
Does the food also contain these elements? 
What different kinds of food or food-stuffs are known ? 
What do nitrogenous food stuffs contain ? 
What are they sometimes called, and why ? 
What do sugar and starches contain ? 
From what is sugar obtained? 
In what kind of food does starch abound? 
What do fats and oils contain ? 
From what are fats and oils derived? 
What is said of mineral substances as articles of food ? 
What is said of water ? 
To be most useful, what should our food contain? 
Why is milk one of the best articles of diet ? 
To what is the term “ flesh-food ” applied ? 
In what material does “ flesh-food ” abound? 
What sort of matters are supplied by breads ? 
What form of nitrogenous food is found in breads ? 144 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
What is the composition of fruits ? 
What is the best diet ? 
How is the quantity of food required to maintain health varied? 
Do the young or old need most food ? 
What do the active require ? 
What effect has weather and climate? 
How often daily should animal food be taken ? 
What amount of animal and vegetable food combined should be 
taken in twenty-four hours ? 
What amount of fluid should be taken daily? 
Why are articles cooked ? 
Is cooking ever necessary to make food safe ? Illustrate. 
How many meals a day should be taken ? 
Why should eating between meals be avoided ? 
How should we eat ? 
What should be our condition of mind while eating ? 
What is the meaning of the word dyspepsia? How is it usually 
caused? 
What is said of tea, coffee, and cocoa? 
What is said of alcoholic drinks ? 
What is the best of all drinks ? 
Is absolutely pure water found in nature ? 
What is a good example of a soft and comparatively pure water? 
How may water become a source of disease ? 
What should be done with water obtained from lakes and rivers 
before using it ? 
Is alcohol food ? 
Recite Dr. Lees’ comparison of alcohol with food. CHAPTER XIII. 
DIGESTION. 
184. The Organs of Digestion.—The organs of 
digestion are the different parts of the alimentary or 
food canal, and the glands communicating with it. 
This canal is a long tube, which is at some places 
wide and at others narrow, at some straight and at 
others twisted. It begins as the mouth and throat. 
In the back part of the chest it is a narrow, straight 
tube, the gullet or oesophagus, the word oesophagus 
meaning “food-carrier.” It continues into the abdo- 
men as the large bag or pouch called the stomach, and 
as the intestines it becomes a long tube, wound and 
turned upon itself in a curious fashion. 
185. What Takes Place in the Mouth.—When 
liquid food is taken into the mouth, it leaves it very 
quickly, passing by way of the throat and gullet to 
the stomach. If the food is solid or partly solid, it is 
chewed by the teeth and acted upon by the secretions 
of the mouth. The mucous membrane of the mouth 
is full of little glands which pour out a watery fluid 
which mixes with the food. Three pairs of large 146 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
glands also pour their secretion, called saliva, into the 
mouth. The largest of the three is the parotid gland, 
which is beneath the skin in front and below each ear. 
The word parotid means “ near the ear.” One of the 
other two is situated just 
beneath the back part of 
the lower jaw, and the other 
in the floor of the mouth 
under the tongue. Saliva 
has the peculiar property 
or function of converting 
starch into sugar. This turn- 
ing of starch into sugar is 
one of the useful processes of 
digestion. Sugar, being more 
soluble than starch, will go 
through the membranes 
and get into the blood more 
readily than starch. After 
the food has undergone 
mastication in the mouth, it 
is swallowed, and passes 
through the gullet to the 
stomach. This gullet or 
oesophagus has a muscular 
coat which contracts around the food, forcing it onward 
and preventing it from returning. 
Fig, 36. 
The Stomach and Intestines. 
186. Digestion in the Stomach.—The stomach is 
a large bag or pouch situated in the upper part of the 
abdomen. In the walls of the stomach are numerous 
glands. Most of these glands secrete an acid fluid DIGESTION. 
147 
which is called the gastric juice, or juice of the stomach. 
When the food reaches the stomach an active flow of 
this juice takes place. The food breaks up and dis- 
solves more than it did in the mouth. This breaking- 
up process is partially due to the action of the gastric 
juice, and partly to a churning movement of the 
stomach. The saliva acts particularly on the starchy 
food. The gastric juice acts most rapidly and strongly 
on nitrogenous or albuminoid substances, such as 
meats, eggs, etc. It is supposed also that some saliva 
flows down into the stomach, and acts upon such 
starchy food as may have escaped its action above. 
The food, after undergoing these processes in the 
stomach, becomes a soft, pulpy, grayish mass, which 
is often called chyme, from a Greek word meaning 
“juice.” While the food is digesting in the stomach, 
it is prevented from escaping by two rings, one at the 
entrance and the other at the outlet of the stomach. 
The ring at the outlet of the stomach, at the end 
which opens into the intestines, is called the pylorus, 
this word meaning “gate-keeper.” It guards the gate 
from the stomach to the intestines. 
187. Digestion in the Small Intestine.—As diges- 
tion in the stomach is completed, the pylorus relaxes, 
and allows the food to pass into the small intestine, a 
tube much twisted upon itself and about twenty-five 
feet long. In the walls of the small intestine are little 
glands which secrete an alkaline fluid, the intestinal 
juice. The intestinal juice keeps the food-pulp moist, 
and probably helps to remove an excess of acidity. 
Stretching across the abdomen, behind the stomach, is 148 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
a long, thin gland, the pancreas or sweet-bread. It 
secretes the pancreatic juice, which is poured by a 
duct into the small intestine near the stomach. This 
j uice acts strongly upon the fats and oils of the food. 
Like saliva, it also has some power of converting 
starch into sugar, and acts upon nitrogenous food, 
but not with the same energy as gastric juice. Still 
another digestive j uice, and a very important one, acts 
upon the food-pulp in the small intestine. This is a 
greenish-yellow liquid, called bile. It is secreted by 
the liver, the largest gland in the body, which is situ- 
ated in the upper part of the right side of the abdo- 
men. A duct or canal from the liver unites with 
the duct from the pancreas, and the pancreatic juice 
and bile are poured into the small intestine at the 
same place. The bile, like the pancreatic juice, acts 
particularly upon the fats and oils, and to some extent 
upon starchy food. Sweet oil and water will not mix 
well, but if they are shaken up with a little pancreatic 
juice and bile a uniform creamy mixture is produced. 
A similar effect is brought about by the action of 
pancreatic juice and bile upon the food in the small 
intestine. 
188. Chyle. —The food, which left the stomach as 
chyme, after it has been acted upon by the intestinal 
juice, the pancreatic juice, and the bile, becomes con- 
verted into a thick, milky fluid which is called chyle, 
a name derived from a Greek word meaning “juice.” 
The nutritious portions of the food are now ready to 
be taken into the blood. 
189. Absorption.—Absorption is the process by DIGESTION. 
149 
which substances are 
taken up and carried 
into the blood. Absorp- 
tion is performed chiefly 
by two sets of vessels, (1) 
the lacteals or lymphatics, 
and (2) the blood-vessels. 
190. Lacteals.—The 
mucous or lining coat of 
the small intestine is cov- 
ered with little projec- 
tions or eminences called 
villi, from the Latin 
word villus, which means 
a “tuft of hair.” In these 
villi minute tubes called 
lacteals, from lac, “milk,” 
terminate. Thousands of 
these little pipes open 
into the intestines by way 
of the villi. They absorb 
from the creamy mass 
which is passing through 
the intestine what is 
needed to strengthen the 
blood. 
191. The Thoracic 
Duct.—Leaving the in- 
testine, the lacteals pass 
through numerous glands 
in the abdomen, and then 
Fig, 37. 
The Thoracic Duct and Lymphatics. 150 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
come together into one common duct called the thoracic 
duct, which is a feeding-pipe to the blood. This duct, 
which is about as large as a goose-quill, and eighteen 
to twenty inches long, passes upward through the 
abdomen and chest in front of the backbone. It is 
called the thoracic duct because its course is chiefly 
in the back part of the chest or thorax. It pours 
its contents into a big vein a little above the heart. 
192. Lymphatics.—The lacteals are a part of a 
system of vessels called lymphatics. These lymphatics 
are tubes or vessels distinct from arteries, veins, and 
capillaries. They usually run along near the veins. 
They do not start, like the blood-vessels, from a great 
pumping heart; but they spring up here and there all 
over the body, uniting from time to time to form larger 
vessels. They carry a colorless fluid called lymph. 
The arteries and capillaries sometimes convey to the 
tissues more nutritive material than the tissues can at 
the time use. The lymphatics take up this surplus, 
but valuable, material; and thus keep it from doing 
harm or going to waste. They finally join with the 
lacteals to empty into the thoracic duct. Along the 
course of the lymphatics are little roundish or flattened 
bodies called lymphatic glands. When one has a 
cold, the lymphatic glands near the surface sometimes 
swell and become hard lumps. 
193. Absorption Directly into the Blood.—Some 
things get into the blood from many places besides 
through the lacteals and lymphatics. Sugar, for in- 
stance, may pass into blood-vessels almost anywhere 
along the alimentary canal, because it dissolves so DIGESTION. 
151 
readily and thoroughly. Water also, which is a very 
necessary part of our food, can slip into the blood 
almost anywhere. Little thin-walled blood-vessels, 
which are in the villi, take up some of the chyle. 
194. The Large Intestine.—The last portion of 
the alimentary canal is the large intestine. It is from 
two to two and a half inches wide and about five feet 
long. Some things which are taken into the alimen- 
tary canal as food and drink are not made use of at 
all; they cannot be or are not digested and taken up 
so as finally to enter the blood. These pass off by way 
of this large intestine. Water is certainly absorbed 
by the large intestine, and some digestion may go on 
in it, but mostly it acts as a channel and temporary 
receptacle for undigested matters, which are finally 
cast out. 
195. Effect of Alcohol on Digestion and the 
Stomach.—Alcohol, except in small quantities, chem- 
ically injures the pepsin and gastric juice, and prevents 
these substances from doing the work in digestion 
assigned to them by nature. A German physician 
named Buchner, as the result of a series of recent 
researches upon the influence of alcohol upon diges- 
tion, came to the conclusion that, in the process of 
digestion, alcohol appears to act unfavorably even 
in small quantities. Alcohol not only interferes with 
the pepsin and gastric juice, but, if its use is con- 
tinued, causes irritation and congestion of the mucous 
membrane of the stomach. It may lead to a chronic 
inflammation or catarrh of the stomach and intestines. 152 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
196. Experiments with Alcohol and Gastric 
Juice.—An English physician named Munroe has 
published some experiments to show that alcohol will 
separate pepsin from gastric juice, and thus interfere 
with digestion. Into a bottle he put minced beef, 
gastric juice, and water; into a second, gastric juice 
and alcohol; and into a third, gastric juice and ale. 
He kept the bottles in motion and at the same heat as 
the human stomach, so as to make the experiments 
correspond as nearly as possible to nature. The re- 
sults obtained indicated that alcohol impaired the 
digesting power of the gastric juice, by separating the 
pepsin from it, as shown in the following table: 
Minced Beef, 
2d Hour. 
4th Hour. 
6th Hour. 
8th Hour. 
10th Hour, 
1st Bottle. 
Gastric juice 
and water. 
Beef 
becomes 
opaque. 
Beef 
separating. 
Beef 
much less 
in quantity. 
Beef 
broken into 
shreds. 
Beef dis- 
solved as in 
soup. 
2d Bottle. 
Gastric juice 
and alcohol. 
No change. 
No change. 
Slight 
coating on 
beef. 
No change. 
Beef solid on 
cooling. 
Pepsin sepa- 
rated from 
the gastric 
juice. 
3d Bottle. 
Gastric juice 
and ale. 
No change. 
Cloudy, 
with coating 
on beef. 
Beef 
partly 
loosened. 
No change. 
Beef not 
digested. 
Pepsin sepa- 
rated from 
the gastric 
juice. 
197. Effect of Tobacco on the Digestive 
System.—The tongue of the confirmed smoker is 
rarely clean, the appetite rarely perfect. The mucous 
membrane of the mouth, tongue, throat, and stomach 
suffers. The stomach is irritated and secretes its 
digestive fluids irregularly, which causes heartburn, QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
eructation, and general debility. The muscular fibres 
of the stomach are also influenced, losing their tone 
and activity. The food, therefore, in a confirmed 
smoker, seldom passes through complete digestion. 
Dyspepsia is one of the maladies of the confirmed 
smoker, and the terms “smoker’s sore throat,” and 
“ smoker’s tongue,” indicate familiar disorders. 
Questions for Review. 
What are the organs of digestion ? 
What is the alimentary or food canal ? 
How does it begin ? 
What is the gullet or oesophagus ? 
What are the parts of the alimentary canal in the abdomen ? 
What becomes of liquid food taken into the mouth ? 
What happens to solid or half-solid food in the mouth ? 
What glands are present in the mucous membrane of the mouth ? 
How many large glands pour their secretion into the mouth ? 
What is this secretion called ? 
What is the name of the largest of these glands ? 
Where is it situated ? 
What does the word parotid mean ? 
Where are the other two glands situated ? 
What peculiar property is possessed by saliva ? 
In what way is the turning of starch into sugar a useful process in 
digestion ? 
What becomes of food after it has undergone mastication in the= 
mouth ? 
How is the food forced onward through the gullet or oesophagus ? 
What is the stomach ? Where is it situated ? 
What are present in the walls of the stomach ? 
What do the glands of the stomach secrete ? 154 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
What takes place when the food reaches the stomach ? 
To what two things is the breaking up and dissolving of the food 
in the stomach due ? 
On what class of food-stuffs does the gastric juice act most rapidly 
and strongly ? 
What does the food become after undergoing the digestive proc- 
esses in the stomach ? 
How is food prevented from escaping from the stomach during di- 
gestion in the stomach ? 
What is the ring or valve at the outlet of the stomach called ? 
What glands are present in the walls of the small intestine ? 
What are the functions of the intestinal juice? 
What long, thin gland is situated behind the stomach ? 
What is secreted by the pancreas ? 
Into what is the pancreatic juice poured? 
Upon what does the pancreatic juice act most strongly ? 
Does the pancreatic juice act upon starch and upon nitrogenous 
food? 
What is bile ? 
By what organ is bile secreted ? 
Into what part of the alimentary canal is bile poured ? 
Upon what does the bile particularly act ? 
Give an illustration to show the action of bile and pancreatic juice 
upon fats and oils. 
What is chyle ? 
From what is the word chyle derived ? 
What is absorption ? 
By what two sets of vessels is it chiefly performed ? 
With what is the lining-coat of the small intestine covered? 
What are the lacteals ? What is their function ? 
What is the thoracic duct? 
Of what system of vessels are the lacteals a part ? 
How do they usually run ? What do they carry ? 
What is the function of the lymphatics ? 
Into what do the lymphatics empty ? 
What are found along the course of the lymphatics ? 
Name some substance absorbed directly into the blood. 
What are the functions of the large intestine ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the digestion and on the stomach? 
What is the effect of tobacco on the digestive system ? CHAPTER XIV. 
BREATHING. 
198. The Air we Breathe.—The air is composed 
chiefly of two gases, oxygen and nitrogen, elements 
which also enter largely into our food. Oxygen is the 
great life-supporter. An animal deprived of it would 
soon die. When a candle burns, the substances in it 
unite with the oxygen of the air, and thus its burning 
is supported. When a lighted candle is put under a 
jar containing air, it will burn for a while and then 
go out, because it has used up all the oxygen and 
left only nitrogen. Nitrogen is necessary to man, but 
not in the same way as oxygen. In the air it acts to 
dilute or weaken the oxygen. Pure oxygen would be 
too much of a good thing. A candle in pure oxygen 
burns very brightly, but it soon bums itself out; so 
life would soon burn out if we breathed pure oxygen. 
199. The Blood Needs Oxygen.—The blood must 
have oxygen, and it gets most of what it needs from 
the air we breathe. The blood in the arteries gen- 
erally is of a bright red hue. The pulmonary or 
lung arteries, however, which carry blood from the 156 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
right side of the heart to the lungs, contain dark blue 
or purple blood. The bright redness is due to the 
oxygen present. If air is kept out of the lungs of a 
living animal—by compressing the windpipe, for in- 
stance—the blood in the arteries will lose its redness; 
it will become dark, like venous blood. The oxygen 
attaches itself in some way to the red corpuscles of 
the blood. It can actually be pumped out of arterial 
blood. 
Fig. 38.—The Larynx, Trachea, Bronchi, and Lungs. 
200. The Chief Organs for Breathing.—The chief 
organs for breathing are the trachea or windpipe, BREATHING. 
157 
which includes the larynx or voice-box, and the lungs. 
The nose, mouth, and throat also act as doorways 
and passage-ways for the air; and the diaphragm and 
certain muscles of the chest help in the act of breath- 
ing. 
201. The Part Played by the Nose in Breathing. 
—The part played by the nose in breathing is by no 
means unimportant. The external air is first drawn 
through the nostrils. Inside the nose are thin plates 
of bones coiled upon themselves and covered with 
mucous membrane containing many blood-vessels. 
These are really “ warming plates,” like the plates of 
a stove * The air passing over them is warmed before 
going to the lungs. Air should not be breathed in 
through the mouth, because it does not contain these 
“warming plates.” Colds are sometimes caught by 
taking cold air into the chest through the mouth. 
202. The Windpipe. —In the front of the neck is 
the trachea or windpipe, the large tube or pipe by 
means of which the air gets down into the lungs. It 
is firm and hard and made up of a number of rings 
of gristle placed one above the other. Behind it is 
the food-pipe or oesophagus. By running the fingers 
along the front of the neck, the rough windpipe can 
be felt through the skin. 
203. The Voice-Box.—The windpipe widens out 
at its upper part to form a sort of box, which opens 
above into the throat. This box is called the larynx, 
a harsh-sounding word, which is derived from a Greek 
*Fothergill’s “Animal Physiology for Schools.” 158 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
word meaning “to shout.” The hard swelling seen 
on the outside of the upper portion of the neck, es- 
pecially in thin people, and sometimes called “ Adam’s 
apple,” is produced by the bulging outwards of the 
larynx. Mucous membrane, vessels, nerves, muscles, 
ligaments, and cartilage all go to make up this won- 
derful little box in which the voice is formed. Ves- 
sels supply it with blood; nerves serve to regulate its 
actions, and the muscles and ligaments are the agents 
for moving it and holding it together. Several carti- 
lages, or pieces of gristle, are so arranged as to give 
the larynx a peculiar shape and fit it better to be a 
good voice-box. 
204. The Vocal Chords.—Voice is made in the 
larynx with the help of the vocal chords. These 
“chords,” as they are called, are not free bands or strings 
running across the cavity of the larynx. They are rather 
elastic lips or cushions fixed to the sides of the larynx, 
and having sharp free edges, between which is a 
narrow chink, the glottis, a Greek term which means 
the “mouth-piece of a flute.” In ordinary breathing, 
a current of air passing through this chink produces 
no sound. "When air is forced out of the lungs in 
voice-making, however, the vocal chords become tight, 
and are drawn in and made to shake or vibrate. This 
shaking or vibration makes the sound of the voice, 
just as sound comes from the tight fiddle-string when 
the bow sets it to vibrating. Speech is more than 
voice. It is the voice changed into sounds which 
have a meaning by the action of the throat, palate, 
tongue, teeth, and lips. BREA THING. 
159 
205. The Lid of the Larynx.—A little lid of 
gristle or cartilage is placed over the top of the larynx. 
It is just behind the tongue at the lower and front part 
of the throat. When it is down, it covers the glottis 
or chink between the vocal chords. It is called the 
epiglottis, from epi, which means “ upon.” When we 
breathe, this little lid lifts up; but when we swallow, 
it drops, and thus food or drink is prevented from 
getting into the voice-box and windpipe. Occasionally, 
especially if we talk or laugh at the same time that we 
are swallowing, the epiglottis does not shut down 
quickly enough, and food goes down the wrong way, 
causing us to cough or choke. Life has been lost in 
this way. 
206. Bronchial Tubes and Air-Cells.—At the 
bottom of the windpipe, tubes or pipes branch to each 
side; from these others of smaller size proceed, and 
from the latter others still 
smaller. These are the 
bronchi or bronchial tubes. 
We have already spoken of 
the trachea as the windpipe; 
in the Greek, however, bron- 
chus means “windpipe,” and 
bronchus is an old term, 
now not often used, for the 
trachea or windpipe. The 
bronchi, then, are smaller 
windpipes, branches of the large windpipe. Some of 
the final bronchi are very small, but they are all hol- 
low, just as much’as are the trachea and large bronchi, 
Fig. 39—Air-Cells Magnified. 160 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
into which sticks might be thrust. Away out at the 
ends of the very finest bronchial tubes are little round 
bladders called air-cells. The lungs are made up 
largely of millions of these air-cells and fine bronchial 
tubes. 
207. Inspiration and Expiration.—Air drawn in 
through the nose or mouth, or both, passes into the 
larynx and windpipe, and then into the bronchi and air- 
cells. This drawing of air into the lungs is inspira- 
tion. After it has done its part, the air is driven out 
again from the air-cells through bronchi, windpipe, 
larynx, throat, and mouth or nose, this being expira- 
tion. The whole process of breathing, including both 
inspiration and expiration, is called respiration. In 
the case of an adult in good health, this breathing in 
and breathing out takes place about seventeen or 
eighteen times every minute. 
208. The Lungs and the Chest.—The lungs are 
within the cavity called the chest or thorax. It is 
an air-tight chamber. The diaphragm is its lower 
boundary. It has the sternum or breast-bone in its 
front and the back-bone or spine behind; and from 
back-bone to breast-bone run around the ribs. They 
are firmly attached to the breast-bone by gristle, but 
each rib is connected with the back-bone by a joint, 
which allows a little motion. Between the ribs are 
muscles; and when these muscles contract they pull 
up the ribs and cause the breast-bone to bulge forward, 
and thus more room is made for the lungs during in- 
spiration. 
209. The Diaphragm.—Between the chest and the BREA THING. 
161 
abdomen is the strong muscular partition, the dia- 
phragm. The lungs come down closely upon this 
diaphragm. When they are empty, or nearly so, that 
is, just after expiration, this diaphragm arches upward, 
following them as they shrink. When air is drawn 
into the lungs, the air-cells everywhere fill out; room 
must be made; the diaphragm moves downwards 
before the swelling air-cells. The organs below the 
diaphragm—the liver, stomach, spleen, intestines, and 
kidneys—are also pushed downwards. The diaphragm 
being a muscle, its fibres contract during in-breathing, 
causing it, as a whole, to flatten and descend. When 
next air is breathed out, it is relaxed and at rest, and 
it is drawn up by the lungs, to which it closely clings. 
210. Stationary Air and Tidal Air.—The lungs 
are not entirely emptied at each expiration or entirely 
filled at each inspiration. A certain amount of air, 
called stationary air, always remains in the air-cells 
of the lungs. Fresh air, or tidal air as it is called, is 
breathed in through the windpipe and bronchi, and 
this mixes with the stationary air of the air-cells and 
makes it purer. Breathing out or expiration then 
takes place, and some of the impure stationary air 
mixed with tidal air is driven out. 
211. How the Oxygen of the Air gets into the 
Blood.—Around the millions of air-cells of the 
lungs is a network of millions of capillary blood- 
vessels. Pumped by the heart, the dark venous 
blood gathered from all parts of the body, rushes 
through the lung arteries into these little vessels. This 
purple blood is loaded with poisonous carbonic acid 162 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
gas, which leaks through the very thin walls of the 
blood-vessels and air-cells and mingles with the air, 
and is breathed out. At the same time oxygen from 
the air that has just been drawn into the lungs finds 
its way through cell-walls and vessel-walls into the 
blood. The blood gains oxygen and loses carbonic 
acid; the air gains carbonic acid and loses oxygen. 
Volatile organic matter and watery vapor are also 
breathed out with the carbonic acid. This organic 
matter is practically the most poisonous constituent 
of expired air. Headache, drowsiness, and weariness 
in a close room are largely due to it. To get rid of 
it is a prime object of ventilation. 
212. Oxidation.—Combustible substances contain 
elements called carbon and hydrogen. The oxygen 
which is in the air unites with the carbon or hydro- 
gen of the burning body, and this process is called 
oxidation. Heat is given out when bodies burn. One 
result of oxidation is the production of warmth or 
heat. Oxidation is constantly going on in the body. 
In food are the same elements which are in the fuel 
burned in the stove or furnace, or in a candle, or in 
the oil of a lamp. We breathe in oxygen. This 
oxygen gets into the blood and then unites with the 
elements of food. The food is oxidized. In this way 
animal heat is produced and life is sustained. Breath- 
ing is one of the chief means of keeping the body 
warm. Oxygen is breathed in by the lungs and fil- 
ters into the blood; it is carried hither and thither 
by the blood; it unites in the blood or tissues with the 
elements of the food. Oxidation is going on when we 
move, feel, will, think, or carry out any other function. QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
163 
213. Effect of Alcohol on the Lungs.—The lungs 
probably suffer more than we at present know, from 
the acute evils imposed by alcohol. Their vessels 
are easily relaxed by alcohol; and as they, of all parts, 
are most susceptible to heat and cold, they are readily 
congested. Fatal congestions of the lungs frequently 
occur among confirmed drinkers, especially in very 
cold weather. Dr. Kichardson has described a pecu- 
liar form of consumption occurring among drunkards, 
which is extremely fatal. In the regular course of 
the circulation, alcohol in the blood passes through 
the lungs. It can be smelled on the breath of those 
who drink. The lungs endeavor to get rid of it 
by expiration, and are to some extent weakened 
and enfeebled by the effort. The air-cells as well as 
the vessels of the lungs may be injured by alcohol. 
214. Effect of Tobacco on the Lungs. — The 
action of the smoke of tobacco on the mucous lining 
of the bronchial passages is to produce much irritation, 
attended often with cough and expectoration. When 
either pulmonary consumption or bronchitis is present, 
smoking adds to the mischief. 
Questions for Review. 
Of what is the air composed ? 
Which constituent of the air is the great life-supporter ? 
How is the burning of a candle supported ? 
Why does a lighted candle put under ajar go out? 
How does the nitrogen act? 
Where does the blood get the oxygen which it needs ? 
What in general is the color of blood in the arteries ? 164 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
What arteries alone contain dark blue or purple blood ? 
To what is the bright redness of arterial blood due ? 
How can the blood in arteries be made to turn dark ? 
To what in the blood is the oxygen attached? 
What are the chief organs for breathing ? 
What part is played by the nose in breathing ? 
What “ warming plates” are found inside of the nose? 
Why should air be breathed into the mouth ? 
How are colds often caught ? 
Where and what is the trachea or windpipe? 
What is the larynx ? Describe its structure. 
How is the voice made in the larynx ? 
What are the vocal chords? 
What is the glottis ? 
What happens to the vocal chords in voice-making ? 
What is placed over the top of the larynx ? 
What is the lid of the larynx called, and why ? 
What happens to the epiglottis when we breathe ? 
What occurs when we swallow ? 
What accidents sometimes happen from talking or laughing at the 
same time that we are swallowing ? 
What are the bronchial tubes ? 
What is the meaning of the word bronchus ? 
What are found away out at the ends of the very finest bronchial 
tubes ? 
Of what are the lungs largely composed ? 
What is the process of inspiration ? 
What is expiration ? 
What is the whole process of breathing called ? 
How often does breathing in and breathing out take place in a 
healthy adult? 
Describe the chest or thorax. 
What is the action of the muscles situated between the ribs ? 
What is the diaphragm ? 
How are the lungs placed with reference to the diaphragm just 
after expiration ? 
What happens to the diaphragm when air is drawn into the lungs, 
and the air-cells everywhere expanded? 
Are the lungs entirely emptied at each expiration ? 
Are the lungs entirely filled at each inspiration ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
165 
What is the air that always remains in the air-cells called ? 
What is the air breathed in at each inspiration called ? 
What net-work surrounds the air-cells of the lungs ? 
Describe the manner in which the venous blood gets into the capil- 
laries of the lungs. 
With what is the purple venous blood loaded? 
What becomes of the carbonic acid gas ? 
At the same time that carbonic acid leaves, how does oxygen enter 
the lungs ? 
What does the blood gain ? What does it lose ? 
What does the air gain ? What does it lose ? 
What is breathed out with the carbonic acid ? 
What is the most poisonous constituent of expired air ? 
What elements are found in combustible substances ? 
What is oxidation ? 
What is given out when bodies burn ? 
What is one of the results of oxidation ? 
What is constantly going on in the body ? 
What elements are found in food ? 
How is animal heat produced ? 
What is one of the chief means of keeping the body warm ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the lungs ? 
What is the effect of tobacco on the lungs ? CHAPTER XV. 
THE AIR AND HEALTH 
215. Pure Air and Its Relation to Health.— 
Pure air is essential to health; the blood calls for enough 
of it to give a full supply of oxygen. In the last 
Chapter, we learned that the lungs were never entirely 
emptied at expiration, nor filled at inspiration, but that 
a certain amount of stationary air always remained. 
This stationary air in the lungs needs to be constantly 
changed and renewed by fresh or tidal air, that it may 
be kept pure. The stationary air has been estimated 
at two hundred and fifty cubic inches; and the tidal 
air, which comes in at each breath, at twenty-six 
cubic inches. The tidal air is, therefore, continually 
renewing and purifying the stationary air. Sickness, 
and other evils, result from an imperfect supply of 
pure air, or from a supply of impure air, to the lungs. 
216. How the Air is kept Pure in Nature.— 
The open air is kept pure and wholesome by certain 
natural processes. It is washed by the dew and rain. 
The sun warms and dries it. Its supply of oxygen 
and carbonic acid is largely regulated by the vegetable 
world—by the gardens, fields, and forests. Oxygen is THE AIR AND HEALTH. 
167 
given out by plants; carbonic acid is absorbed by them. 
Animals, on the other hand, give out carbonic acid, 
and absorb oxygen; and thus a proper balance is pre- 
served. All gases have a tendency to spread or diffuse 
themselves in all directions; so that carbonic acid, 
oxygen, or nitrogen, will not collect in one place. This 
diffusive power helps to keep the air pure. The winds 
increase the diffusion. 
217. How the Air may be Rendered Unwhole- 
some.—The air may be rendered impure and unwhole- 
some in various ways. The total amount of air 
supplied to a given space may be too small. Some of 
the ingredients of the air may be wanting or in excess. 
We have learned that the air is chiefly composed of 
oxygen and nitrogen; but, besides these, pure air also 
contains a nearly fixed amount of carbonic acid, and 
a variable amount of watery vapor. As the amount 
of carbonic acid may be influenced by many special 
causes, variations in the quantity of this gas often 
render the atmosphere impure. The temperature of 
the air may be too high or too low. The air may 
contain too much or too little moisture or watery 
vapor. Sometimes impurity in the form of dust, often 
unseen, is in the air. It is supposed that the dust of 
our rooms frequently contains the germs of disease. 
Exhalations from decaying animal or vegetable mat- 
ters sometimes poison the air. The air of our houses, 
particularly of our city houses, is not infrequently 
rendered impure by sewer-gas, which escapes from the 
drain-pipes which are intended to carry off waste and 
foul matters. 168 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
218. Amount of Fresh Air Required for Health. 
—An individual should be supplied with from one to 
two thousand cubic feet of fresh air per hour. It has 
been calculated that every man should have at least 
eight hundred cubic feet of space to himself, and that 
the atmosphere should have free access directly or 
indirectly to that space. A cubical room, a little 
more than nine feet in each of its dimensions, would 
give this amount of space. A little thought will show 
us how seldom this requirement is met in our homes, 
school-rooms, and public halls. 
219. Air Spoiled by One Man’s Breath.*—Could 
all the carbonic acid exhaled by one man in twenty- 
four hours be collected, and its carbon extracted, the 
latter would be equal to half a pound or more of 
charcoal, besides the organic matter given off' the 
amount of which cannot be easily estimated. In twenty- 
four hours, one person will render many thousand 
cubic feet of confined air unfit for breathing, chiefly 
through the original matter exhaled. The air of 
occupied rooms should be changed continually. 
220. Excess of Carbonic Acid in the Air.—Some- 
times the air contains too much carbonic acid. This 
poisonous gas is constantly being given off by the 
lungs in breathing. Decaying animal and vegetable 
matter and burning bodies also produce it. Too 
* Our Homes, by Henry Hartshorne, A.M., M.D. One of the series 
of American Health Primers edited by W. W. Keen, M.D., and pub- 
lished by Presley Blakiston, Philadelphia, 1880. Many valuable 
facts and ideas with reference to the air and ventilation have been 
obtained from this book. THE AIR A HD HEALTH. 
169 
many people should not be gathered together in a 
small or badly-aired room, or carbonic acid and poi- 
sonous organic matter will collect in large amounts, 
and cause depression and languor. In mines, car- 
bonic acid, and other poisonous gases, sometimes form, 
which injure or cause the death of the miners. 
221. Deadly Effects of Carbonic Acid.—Many 
striking illustrations might be given of the deadly 
effects of an excess of carbonic acid in the air. In 
Italy is a cave or grotto through which a man may 
pass without danger, but a dog on entering it is in- 
stantly suffocated. Carbonic acid gas is here con- 
stantly issuing from the earth, and, on account of its 
weight, accumulates at the bottom of the cavern, 
while the air above is comparatively pure. In the 
Island of Java is a “Valley of Poison,” where the 
ground is covered with the skeletons of birds and 
animals which have been suffocated by carbonic acid, 
which is present in large quantities. In Italy, also, is 
the Lake of Avernus, surrounded on every side but 
one by steep and densely wooded hills. The word 
“Avernus” is derived from Greek words meaning 
“ without birds.” According to the story, birds fly- 
ing over the lake are poisoned by carbonic acid, and 
fall dead into the water. The ancients believed that 
this lake was the entrance to the infernal regions. 
Carbonic acid gas is sometimes used to suffocate 
butterflies and other insects when it is desired to pre- 
serve their colors perfect. In some of our large cities 
it is used to kill the dogs at the pounds, death by this 
method being painless. 170 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
222. Terrible Results of Crowding.—When hu- 
man beings are crowded together, they breathe not 
only the carbonic acid and impure matters exhaled by 
others, but also rebreathe their own impure exhala- 
tions. The blood is poisoned, and the effects are 
sometimes terrible. The story of the “ Black Hole of 
Calcutta ” is often told to illustrate this fact. During 
a war in India, in the hot month of June, 1756, one 
hundred and forty-six Englishmen were shut up in a 
little room which contained only two very narrow 
windows. In eight hours all but twenty-three died. 
A steamer was overtaken at sea by a storm; the cap- 
tain ordered all the passengers below, and then fas- 
tened down the hatches to prevent the water from 
getting into the vessel. In six hours, seventy-two 
died of suffocation. 
223. Diseases of the Lungs and Air-Passages.— 
That common form of indisposition or sickness called 
a “ cold,” is sometimes caught by breathing through 
the mouth instead of the nose. Cold air is thus taken 
directly into the lungs instead of being tempered by 
the “ warming-plates ” in the nose. Colds are taken 
in many other ways, however; as, by exposure, par- 
ticularly when heated, to draughts of air; by remain- 
ing too long in wet clothes; or by an insufficient or 
excessive amount of clothing. Croup, an affection of 
the larynx and windpipe; bronchitis, an inflammation 
of the mucous membrane which lines the bronchial 
tubes; and pneumonia, or inflammation of the lungs, 
are some of the diseases which result from improper 
exposure to cold and dampness. Consumption, or THE AIR AND HEALTH. 
171 
phthisis, that much dreaded chronic disease, which 
causes destruction of the lungs, is often induced by 
impure air. A life in the open air, with plenty of 
good food and sufficient exercise, are among the best 
means of warding off or treating this disease. 
Natural Shape of 
the Waist. 
Shape of the Waist Deformed 
by Tight-Lacing, 
224. Clothing with Reference to the Lungs and 
Breathing.—Clothing should be so worn as to allow 
the lungs and chest full chance to expand, or sufficient 
air will not enter the lungs to purify the blood. In 
children especially, while the bones are soft and yield- 
ing, the clothing should not be too tight. The bony 
frame-work of the chest is by nature somewhat wider 
below than above. Tight-lacing changes this natural 
state of things and causes deformity. 172 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
Questions for Review. 
Why is pure air essential to health ? 
Why does the stationary air in the lungs need to be constantly 
changed and renewed? 
To how much does this stationary air amount ? 
How much tidal air comes in at each breath ? 
What result from an imperfect supply of pure air ? 
How is the open air kept pure and wholesome ? 
By what is it washed ? What warms and dries it ? 
How is its supply of oxygen and carbonic acid largely regulated ?' 
What is given out by plants ? What is absorbed by them ? 
What is given out by animals ? What is absorbed by them ? 
What tendency have all gases ? 
What does the diffusive power of gases help to do ? 
How do the winds act ? 
Mention some of the methods by which the air may be rendered 
impure and unwholesome. 
What is said of carbonic acid and organic matter rendering the air 
impure ? 
What is said of temperature, moisture, dust, organic exhalations, 
and sewer-gas ? 
How much fresh air per hour should be supplied to an individual ? 
How many cubic feet of space should he have to himself? 
How many cubic feet of air will a man render unfit for breathing 
in twenty-four hours ? 
How much carbon could be extracted from the carbonic acid ex- 
haled by a man in twenty-four hours ? 
Mention some of the ways in which an excess of carbonic acid 
originates. 
Give some illustrations of the deadly effects of an excess of carbonic 
acid in the air. 
Give some illustrations of the terrible results of crowding. 
How are colds sometimes caught ? 
Name some diseases of the air-passages and lungs which result 
from improper exposure to cold and dampness. 
How is consumption often induced ? 
State the best means of preventing or treating this disease. 
IIow should clothing be worn ? What is said about tight-lacing ? CHAPTER XVI. 
VENTILATION. 
225. Ventilation.—The word ventilation is derived 
from the Latin, ventus, “ air ” or “ wind.” To “ venti- 
late” a place literally is to “cause the air to pass 
through it.” Ventilation i3 the process by which the 
air to be breathed is kept pure. The buildings in 
which we live, and the lungs with which we breathe, 
should always be kept well ventilated. The tidal air 
ventilates the stationary air of the lungs. When we 
speak of ventilation, however, we generally have ref- 
erence to the processes employed to keep our houses, 
churches, school-rooms, and public halls supplied with 
pure air. 
226. Objects to be Aimed at in Ventilation.— 
The objects to be aimed at in ventilation are: 1. To 
move uniformly through a building the required 
amount of pure, fresh air. 2. Duly to distribute this 
air to the different apartments in the house. 3. Prop- 
erly to diffuse it in each room. 4. To remove the 
vitiated air from every room in the building. 5. To 174 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
warm the air sufficiently in winter. 6. To supply it 
with an appropriate amount of moisture.* 
227. Natural Ventilation.—The term natural or 
accidental ventilation is applied to that ventilation 
which is brought about by the ordinary construction 
of our dwelling-houses and public buildings—chiefly 
by doors, windows, and open fireplaces. Doors and 
windows which can be opened and shut at pleasure 
answer very well in some seasons and climates. Open 
fireplaces, when constructed properly, are efficient 
aids to ventilation. A fireplace with a wide-throated 
chimney, and either a coal-grate or a wood-fire burn- 
ing in it, seldom needs any inlets or outlets for venti- 
lation besides the cracks which unintentionally exist 
in windows and doorways. 
228. The Walls of Buildings Permeable to Air. 
—Natural ventilation is accomplished in part by the 
walls of our buildings, through which more or less air 
will find its way. Brick, sandstone, and mortar can 
be penetrated by the air. The air which passes 
through walls may not be felt, because currents of air 
moving at a rate less than about twenty inches a second 
are not sensibly perceived. A scientist, named Petten- 
kofer, devised a curious experiment to show how air 
penetrates through gravel. He half filled a glass 
cylinder with gravel, over which a wire netting was 
placed; in this a canary bird was put, over him another 
wire netting, and above that the cylinder was filled to 
the top with gravel. The bird lived all day without 
* The facts in this and several succeeding paragraphs have been 
chiefly obtained from Dr. Hartshorne’s book. 175 
VENTILA TION. 
seeming to be incommoded for want of air. The 
warmth of its body induced a gentle ascending and 
descending current of air around it through the two 
layers of gravel, the upper one communicating with 
the atmosphere. Without such a movement to renew 
the air for it to breathe, it would have been fatally 
poisoned in a very few hours. 
229. Artificial Ventilation.—Artificial ventilation 
is that which is afforded bj special apparatus or arrange- 
ments. To admit pure air to a room, one of the sim- 
plest plans is the insertion of a piece of wood made to 
fit under the lower sash of a window raised a few 
inches. Air then enters upwards between the two 
sashes at their place of junction. Another arrange- 
ment * is to place a piece of cloth or paper on the 
lower ten or twelve inches of the window-frame, and 
then raise the lower sash more or less, according to the 
weather. To get an upward-directed draught, a good 
method is to fix an upward-sloping board about six 
or eight inches below the top of a window, and then 
let down the upper sash a few inches. To allow air 
to come in slowly and without draught, another 
plan is to remove a pane from a window, and in its 
place to introduce wire gauze, or a piece of zinc per- 
forated with a number of small holes. An ingenious, 
but not complicated, apparatus is that known as 
Maine’s elbow-tube ventilator, which consists of a 
board (made in two parts sliding on each other, so as 
to be adjusted to different windows) to be placed under 
a raised sash, but having passed through it two pipes 
* Suggested by Dr. W. W. Keen, of Philadelphia. 176 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
or tubes, about six inches in diameter, each bent up- 
ward in an elbow—the top of each tube being open 
above, and supplied with a regulating valve. 
230. Relation of Inlets to Outlets in Ventilating. 
—To ventilate a room thoroughly, it is necessary to 
have outlets as well as inlets for the air. For rooms 
warmed by heated air, various arrangements for allow- 
ing air to enter and pass out have been invented. 
Sometimes, warm air enters near, or in the floor, and 
escapes above, near or in the ceiling. The outlet may 
be situated at various points with reference to the 
inlet. Some of the best recent authorities recommend 
that outlets should be at or near the level of the 
floor, because a great loss of heat occurs when outlets 
are in or near the ceiling, and because in this case 
narrow currents of air are established between the in- 
lets and outlets, leaving much of the impure air un- 
disturbed below. In the northwestern part of Phila- 
delphia several blocks of houses have been built with 
an improved arrangement for ventilation. Each house 
has an air-chamber between the roof and upper floor. 
Narrow openings for air are placed in the walls at the 
sides of this chamber; and a ventilator is placed be- 
tween it and the room below. The outlet to the cham- 
ber is a ventilating-pipe in the roof. 
231. Temperature of the Air in Living Rooms. 
—For a school-room or sitting-room a temperature of 
about 68° to 70° Fahrenheit is the best in our climate. 
For a workshop, gymnasium, or any room in which 
active exercise is being taken, a lower temperature VENTILA TION. 
177 
will be better. For a sick-chamber, a temperature 
above 70° may sometimes be desirable. Over-heated 
or unequally-heated rooms are injurious to health. 
232. Moisture of the Air in Living-Rooms.— 
The air of a living room, to be healthy, should always 
contain a certain amount of moisture. Stoves and 
furnaces sometimes cause undue dryness of the atmos- 
phere. The proportion of moisture or aqueous vapor 
in the atmosphere may vary greatly. The possible 
amount present depends largely on the temperature. 
The higher air is heated the more watery vapor it is 
able to contain. When the rooms of a house are kept 
at a high temperature by means of heated air, some 
special arrangements should be made to evaporate 
water in them. A shallow pan of water placed over 
a stove or near a register will answer. Many heaters 
are supplied with an evaporating pan, by means of 
which moisture is supposed to be supplied to a whole 
house; but this alone will not do, as different apart- 
ments may be heated unequally, and the degree of 
humidity, as just stated, varies with the tempera- 
ture. 
233. The Ventilation of School-Rooms and 
Public Buildings.—School-rooms, where growing 
children spend so many hours at their tasks, should 
be thoroughly ventilated. The mind cannot be bright 
when the air is impure. Good authority asserts that 
from one to two thousand cubic feet of pure air should 
be supplied hourly to every child confined in school, 
in order that perfect health may be sustained. Very 
much less than this is usually furnished. Too often 178 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
little or no attention is paid to ventilation; pupils 
become listless and stupid; and their health is under- 
mined. Our churches, theatres, and public halls are 
equally neglected. 
234. The Ventilation of Bedrooms.—Fresh air 
should not be excluded from bedrooms. Some people, 
believing night-air to be unhealthy, keep the rooms 
in which they sleep as close as possible; they try to 
shut out every breath of air as if it were poison. Un- 
less a house is very loosely built, it is better, as a rule, 
to open the windows of a sleeping-room a little, even 
in cold weather; although most people cannot stand 
to have a draught of air blowing directly upon them 
while asleep. The old fashion of surrounding a bed 
with curtains, or putting it in a curtained recess, was 
a very bad one, but fortunately is now but little in 
vogue. The sleeper was thus compelled to breathe 
over and over again his own poisonous breath. 
Questions for Review. 
From what is the word ventilation derived ? 
Define ventilation. 
By what is the stationary air of the lungs ventilated ? 
When we speak of ventilation, to what do we generally refer ? 
What six objects should be aimed at in ventilation? 
To what is the term natural or artificial ventilation applied ? 
How is natural ventilation usually accomplished ? 
What is said of doors, windows, and open fireplaces ? 
Does air penetrate the walls of our buildings ? 
At what rate must currents of air move in order to be sensibly 
perceived ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
179 
Describe an experiment to show how air penetrates through 
gravel. 
What is artificial ventilation ? 
Mention some of the best methods of admitting air into a room. 
Describe Maine’s elbow-tube ventilator. 
What is said of outlets for air ? 
What do some of the best recent authorities recommend as to inlets 
and outlets ? 
Describe an arrangement for ventilating some houses recently built 
in Philadelphia. 
What is the best temperature for a school-room or sitting-room ? 
What is the best temperature for a workshop or a gymnasium ? 
What temperature may sometimes be desirable for a sick-room ? 
What is said about moisture in the air of a living-room ? 
What is sometimes the effect of stoves and furnaces ? 
Upon what does the possible amount of moisture m the atmosphere 
largely depend ? 
When the rooms of a house are kept at a high temperature, what 
should be done to insure a proper amount of moisture ? 
How many cubic feet of air should be supplied hourly to every 
child in school ? 
Is proper attention paid to ventilation of school-rooms and public 
buildings ? 
Mention some facts about the ventilation of bedrooms. CHAPTER XVII. 
EXCRETION, OR GETTING RID OF WASTE 
MATTERS. 
235. Wear and Waste.—The body is wearing and 
wasting, as well as growing and repairing, all the 
time. We eat and drink a number of times each 
day, and, besides, we are constantly breathing in oxy- 
gen, which is a real food to the blood. Food, as we 
have learned, makes the blood rich, and the blood 
feeds the tissues—bone, muscle, nerve, glands, etc. 
The blood is constantly building these tissues. The 
parts of the body are, however, always at work, and 
everything that works must wear and waste, so that 
tissues are as constantly breaking down as they are 
building. Our bodies are always being made and 
unmade. It is a curious fact that the blood, which is 
the chief agent in building the tissues, also receives 
the products of their wasting. It takes up the useless 
particles, and carries them to the organs which cast 
them out of the body. 
236. Wasting and Destruction are not the Same. 
—The different parts of the body waste through the EXCRETION. 
181 
process of oxidation, but they are not destroyed. 
They change into other forms. When a frame house 
burns, it disappears as a house and as wood, but in the 
smoke and in the ashes are the same elements which 
were in the wood at first, with the addition of the 
oxygen which was taken from the air during the 
burning. This is similar to what takes place in the 
body. Substances which the blood gets from the 
food are oxidized or burnt up; tissues also are oxi- 
dized ; but their elements are not destroyed. 
237. The Principal Waste-Products of the 
Body.—These waste-products of the body usually be- 
come in the blood either water, carbonic acid, or urea, 
with small quantities of certain salts. Water is com- 
posed of hydrogen and oxygen; carbonic acid, of car- 
bon and oxygen; urea, of carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, 
and oxygen; and most of the salts contain oxygen, 
metals, and such substances as sulphur and phosphorus. 
In our food and tissues we have carbon, hydrogen, 
nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, sulphur, etc. ; in the 
air is all-important oxygen. It is in great measure 
through the process of oxidation—through other sub- 
stances seizing oxygen or oxygen seizing them—that 
waste-products are formed. 
238. Waste Water.—Water is taken into the 
body, or is formed there in many ways. Much is 
taken in by drinking, much in our solid food. Oxy- 
gen seizes hydrogen in many places where tissues are 
breaking up into their elements, and thus also water 
is formed. 182 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
239. Carbonic Acid.—The oxygen which is being 
constantly breathed in by the lungs goes, as we have 
learned, all through the body; the red corpuscles of 
the blood acting as oxygen-carriers. They carry the 
oxygen into the tissues, wherever it is needed. The 
tissues all contain carbon. In some way, not yet fully 
understood, this carbon unites with the oxygen; and 
carbonic acid gas is formed. The blood, if examined 
chemically, can be shown to contain this carbonic 
acid. 
240. Urea.—Urea is a substance in some respects 
like ammonia or hartshorn, but more complicated in 
composition. Many tissues, such as muscle and nerve, 
contain nitrogen in large amounts. Urea results 
largely from the wasting of these nitrogenous tis- 
sues ; but it is also partly derived from other tissues 
containing carbon and hydrogen. It also springs partly 
from the action of some of the fluids of the alimen- 
tary canal upon nitrogenous food. It is really pro- 
duced by a partial oxidation—the same process of 
oxidation which gives carbonic and water, only the 
process does not go far enough for carbonic acid and 
water to be formed. 
241. Excretion.—The process by which these waste- 
products of the body are taken from the blood and 
cast out of the system is called excretion, which means 
the “act of sifting out.” The waste-products them- 
selves are called excretions. Excretions differ from se- 
cretions, such as saliva, bile, gastric juice, and the like, 
in that the latter have a purpose to serve in the body, 
while the former are simply refuse and waste matters. EXCRETION. 
183 
Excretion is carried on by the shin, the lungs, the 
kidneys, the liver, and the intestines. 
242. The Skin as an Organ of Excretion. In 
Chapter I. the skin was described as consisting of an 
outer very thin layer called the epidermis, and of an 
inner and thicker layer, the dermis, or true skin. 
Running through both epidermis and dermis is an open 
channel, the sweat-duct, which in the latter coils up 
into a knot. This knotted end of the tube is a sweat- 
gland, (Fig. 40.) It is surrounded by a 
mesh or network of thin-walled capillary 
blood-vessels. The sweat-glands, which 
are exceedingly numerous, excrete waste 
water from the system as sweat or perspi- 
ration. Some chemical salts, in very small 
quantity, are dissolved in the sweat or per- 
spiration, which passes off by the skin. We 
are really sweating more or less all the time. 
Physiologists speak of two kinds of per- 
spiration, sensible and insensible. Sensible 
perspiration is that which we can see and 
feel, the ordinary sweat; insensible perspi- 
ration is that which is going on without 
being seen. The reason it is not recog- 
nized is because it passes off as steam or 
vapor as soon as it is formed. 
243. The Lungs as Organs of Excretion.—The 
blood loaded with carbonic acid and poisonous or- 
ganic matter comes to the capillary vessels of the 
lungs. This gas finds its way through the thin walls 
of the vessels and air-cells. Much water also leaks 
Fig. 40, 
Vertical Sec* 
tion of the 
skin. (Highly 
magnified,) 184 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
from the blood and is exhaled with the breath. Glass 
can be moistened by breathing on it. 
244. The Kidneys as Organs of Excretion.—The 
kidneys are two in number, and are situated in the 
lower back part of the abdominal cavity, one on each 
side of the spinal column. Each kidney is between 
four and five inches long and from two to three inches 
in breadth. Blood-vessels enter the kidneys. The 
blood brought to the kidneys contains some of the 
waste-products of the tissues, particularly the urea. 
These waste matters, in the form of a liquid, are 
secreted or filtered from the blood into little tubes 
in the kidneys. This liquid, which consists mainly 
of urea dissolved in a very large quantity of water, 
with, however, small quantities of other animal and 
mineral substances, is finally collected by the body, 
and then cast out of the body. 
245. Similarity of the Organs of Excretion.— 
The skin chiefly excretes water in the form of sweat, 
but small quantities of carbonic acid, and even of urea, 
are also passed off by it. The lungs are mainly con- 
cerned with casting out carbonic acid, organic matter, 
and water, but urea in small amount is also found in 
expired air. The kidneys have for their chief func- 
tion the excretion of water and urea, but they also get 
rid of some carbonic acid. These three sets of organs, 
working together, prevent the machinery of the body 
from becoming clogged and choked with impurities. 
W e should constantly aim to keep them in good work- 
ing condition, in order that they may be able to carry 
out their functions. 185 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
246. Effect of Alcohol on the Kidneys.—The 
kidneys suffer greatly from the continued influence 
of alcohol. Their minute structure undergoes fatty 
changes; their vessels lose elasticity and power of 
contraction; or their membranes permit that impor- 
tant constituent of the blood which is known as albu- 
men to pass through them. The body loses power as 
it is thus gradually drained. The serious affection 
known as “Bright’s disease of the kidneys” often 
results from the use of alcoholic drinks. 
Questions for Review. 
What is happening to the body all the time ? 
What is the chief agent in building tissues? 
What receives the products of the wasting of the tissues ? 
What does the blood do with the useless particles ? 
Through what process do the different parts of the body waste ? 
What happens when a frame house burns ? 
What substances are oxidized ? 
Are the tissues also oxidized ? 
Are the elements of the food and of the tissues destroyed when 
oxidation takes place ? 
What are the principal waste-products of the body ? 
What is the composition of water, of carbonic acid, of urea, and 
of the salts ? 
What elements enter into our food and tissues ? 
What important element is in the air ? 
How is water taken into the body ? 
How is it formed in the body ? 
Describe the process by which carbonic acid is formed in the body. 
What substance does urea resemble ? 
What tissues contain nitrogen in large amounts ? 
How is urea largely produced ? 
From what, also, does it partly spring ? 186 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
What is the real nature of the process by which urea is produced ? 
Define excretion. 
What is the difference between excretions and secretions ? 
What are the organs of excretions ? 
What channel runs through the skin ? 
What is the knotted end of the sweat-duct called ? 
What do the sweat-glands excrete ? 
What is sensible perspiration ? 
What is insensible perspiration ? 
What excretions are cast out by the lungs? 
Describe the kidneys. 
What waste matters are excreted by the kidneys ? 
Explain the similarity between the organs of excretion. 
What do the three sets of excretory organs accomplish ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the kidneys ? CHAPTER XVIII. 
HINTS ON HYGIENE, ACCIDENTS, AND 
POISONS. 
247. Rules of Simple Hygiene.*—The following 
rules of simple hygiene will be found useful: 
Wash the whole body, at least twice in every week, either with 
cold or slightly warmed water, and rub thoroughly dry with a 
rough towel. 
The least one can do, with any attention to cleanliness or health, 
is to sponge the face, chest, and back with water, and dry rub the 
rest of the body at least once every day. 
For a thorough wash of the hands, use warm water, and before 
soaping them, steep them well in the water for a minute or two, rub- 
bing them the while, then use soap and a nail-brush. End by hold- 
ing the hands under a tap of cold water, and “ give them a shower- 
bath : ” it is refreshing and strengthening to the fingers; or dip 
them into cold water and rub them dry as quickly as possible. 
* These “ rules of simple hygiene ” are from Hints and Remedies 
for the Treatment of Common Accidents and Diseases, and Rules of 
Simple Hygiene, compiled by Dawson W. Turner, D.C.L.: Macmillan 
& Co., New York. The rules are given with omissions, additions, and 
changes in language and arrangement. Dr. Turner’s book has been 
drawn upon for other material for the present chapter. We have also 
made use of a valuable little book by Dr. Charles W. Dulles, entitled 
What to do First in Accidents or Poisoning, published by Presley 
Blakiston, Philadelphia, 1880; and of a larger volume of Plain Di- 
rections for Accidents and Poisons, distributed by the Mutual Life 
Insurance Company of New York. 188 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
If possible, get that most cleansing thing, a hot bath, once a 
week; use plenty of soap, with a flannel, over the whole body, and 
scour with a pretty hard bath-brush ; then soak for a few minutes, 
and come out “ as clean as a new shilling.” 
Use a flesh-brush, or rough towel, on the skin once a day. The- 
best time is at night. 
Brush the teeth the last thing every night before going to bed, 
and comb and brush the hair the wrong way, or any way but the 
right way, so as to let the air in upon the head. 
Rinse out the mouth, or, better still, brush the teeth after every 
meal. 
Tooth-brushes cannot be too soft. Hard brushes make the gums 
recede from the teeth, and produce premature decay by causing the 
soft bone of the tooth to be exposed to the air, beyond the part of 
the tooth protected by the enamel. 
Do not plaster down the hair with pomatum or pomade; the hair 
is meant to assist in carrying off perspiration, and should not be 
clogged with grease. No appreciable mischief results from oiling 
it occasionally; nor does sweet-oil do any harm to any part of the 
body, if it is rubbed into the skin before a fire, but, on the contrary, 
it does good, as it renders the limbs supple and more capable of 
strong muscular exertion. 
Beware of drinking any very hot fluids. After fatigue and long 
fasts, hot fluids, only not too hot, are valuable, and a few mouth- 
fuls, taken in such cases before beginning to eat, are useful, espe- 
cially for elderly people. 
Avoid much use of sweets, tarts, pastry, confectionery, and sugar. 
All clothing, particularly that which is worn next to the skin, 
should be turned inside out before going to bed, and hung up to air 
above the level of the head. 
Open the bed entirely in the morning, lifting the sheet and blan- 
ket so as to let the air get underneath; and leave the windows open 
top and bottom. 
Never sit down to breakfast without first going out into the 
open air for a few minutes. Make the walk longer or shorter, 
according to health and strength. 
If any one is ill with fever, or with any infectious disease, do not 
visit him the first thing in the morning before eating, but take a HINTS ON HYGIENE. 
189 
mouthful of coffee or tea, and a crust of bread, before entering his 
bedroom. 
To avoid infection, keep everything clean. Cleanliness is the 
best of disinfectants. Keep all drains in good repair and flush 
them with plenty of water. Corrosive sublimate is now regarded 
as the most powerful disinfecting agent. One-fourth to one-half 
an ounce can be added to a gallon of water for disinfecting pur- 
poses. It is, however, a deadly poison, and should be used with ex- 
treme care. Copperas and chloride of zinc are safe and valuable 
•disinfectants. About an ounce of either of these salts may be 
used in a water-closet. Carbolic acid, half a pint to a pailful of 
water, may be used, although not now considered as valuable as 
the others. All powerful disinfectants are more or less poisonous. 
If troubled with cold feet at night, rub them well before getting 
into bed; and if that does not answer, sponge them with cold water, 
and, while drying them, rub the toes and ankles upwards, and not 
downwards. In case this plan fails, as it does sometimes, and the 
feet still remain cold, try putting them in a mustard foot-bath before 
stepping into bed, and put on a pair of thick, dry woollen socks di- 
rectly afterwards. The socks can be removed as soon as the feet 
•are warm. 
Avoid all hot and heavy suppers, unless desirous of an attack 
•of nightmare. A so-called “ severe tea ” late at night is usually 
unwholesome. Never go to bed, however, with an entirely “empty 
stomach.” This is often the cause of “insomnia,” or sleeplessness, 
■especially in elderly persons. 
If troubled with sleeplessness, sponge the whole body before 
going to bed, and rub dry with a Turkish towel; use the dumb 
bells or any other gymnastic exercise, and jump into bed warm, 
and banish unpleasant thoughts. 
Finally, try to keep a clear conscience, an even temper, a light 
heart, and a good digestion. 
248. Asphyxia.—The word asphyxia, now com- 
monly applied to cases of suspended animation or ap- 
parent death from various causes, is a term derived 
from the Greek, and really means an “ absence of pulse.” 
The lungs, as we have learned, convert the dark and 190 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
poisonous venous blood into life-renewing arterial 
blood. This change is effected through the pure tidal 
air which is breathed in by the lungs. In asphyxia, 
the supply of tidal air is in some way cut off. When 
the head is under water, as in drowning; when foul 
gases are inhaled, or when a foreign body stops up the 
air-passages, asphyxia may result. Death in such 
cases may be prevented by taking prompt measures 
that will insure the admission of abundance of fresh 
air into the lungs. 
249. Apparent Drowning.—In apparent drowning, 
the body should be taken from the water as soon as 
possible, and turned over upon its face for a moment. 
A finger should be swept around in the mouth to 
bring away any mucus or other substances that 
may be present. The body should be laid out flat on 
the back, with something a few inches high under the 
shoulders. The tongue should be drawn well forward 
and held out of the mouth by means of a handker- 
chief, and the effort to secure artificial respiration 
begun as follows: Some one should place himself on 
his knees behind the patient’s head, seize both arms 
near the elbows and sweep them around horizontally, 
away from the body and over the head till they 
meet above it, when a strong pull should be made 
upon them, and kept up two or three seconds. This 
effects an inspiration—fills the lungs with air, by 
drawing the ribs up and so enlarging the cavity of 
the chest. The second manoeuvre consists simply in 
returning the arms to their former position alongside 
the chest, and then making firm pressure against the 191 
HINTS ON HYGIENE. 
lower ribs, so as to drive the air out of the chest and 
effect an act of expiration. This need occupy but a 
second of time. If this plan is regularly carried out, it 
will make about sixteen complete acts of respiration 
in a minute. It should be kept up for a long time, 
until a competent person has ascertained that the heart 
has ceased to beat. Warmth should be applied by 
heated flannels, or in any other convenient way; and a 
stimulant should be given as soon as it can be swal- 
lowed. A teaspoonful to a tablespoonful of whiskey 
or brandy should be given every few minutes, until a 
decided effect is produced. As natural respiration 
begins to be attempted, it should be aided as much as 
possible by timing the artificial to it. When resusci- 
tation is accomplished, the person should be put in a 
warm bed, being carried carefully, with the head low, 
and a watch kept to see that the breathing does not 
suddenly stop. 
250. Asphyxia from Noxious Gases. — Certain 
poisonous gases are given off during the burning of 
charcoal. Anthracite and bituminous coal, when 
burned in a close room, as a kitchen shut up for the 
night with an open stove of these burning coals, also 
give off noxious gases. Persons sleeping in such a 
room, unless awakened as the air becomes fouled, will 
be found senseless or dead soon after. Persons retiring 
at night may leave the gas “ turned down; ” the flame 
becomes extinguished, and enough gas escapes to poison 
the inmates of the room. Asphyxia, or suffocation, 
from these or other noxious gases, calls for removal to 
the open air, dashing with cold water, stimulants, and 192 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
the employment of artificial respiration, as described 
in speaking of apparent drowning. Risk of poison- 
ing from these sources can be obviated by leaving the 
window down from the top, and raising it a few inches 
from the bottom, thus securing proper ventilation. 
251. Heatstroke or Heat-Exhaustion.—Intense 
heat, either from the sun or from artificial sources, 
produces one of two conditions, either heatstroke or 
heat-exhaustion. Heatstroke, sometimes called sun- 
stroke, appears to he decidedly favored by intemper- 
ance, want of acclimatization, and debility. The skin 
is hot and dry, the pulse rapid, and the patient uncon- 
scious. The person attacked should at once be carried 
to a cool, airy spot. Unnecessary bystanders must be 
kept at a distance, as the person in this, as in every 
other accident, needs all the pure air he can get. The 
clothing should be removed, and the patient placed on 
his back, with the head raised a couple of inches by a 
folded garment. The entire body, particularly the 
head and chest, should be dashed with cold water in 
profusion, should be rubbed with ice, and ice should 
be applied to the head and spine. Physicians usually 
inject quinine beneath the skin. For heat-exhaustion, 
in which the body is cool, the skin moist, the pulse 
small, and the muscles relaxed, or sometimes convulsed, 
a few drops of laudanum in a tablespoonful of whiskey 
or brandy will be very useful. In these cases it has 
been found by physicians that morphia injected beneath 
the skin gives immediate relief. 
252. Fainting.—Persons sometimes fall in what is 
called a swoon or faint. An attack of fainting is ordi- 193 
HINTS ON HYGIENE. 
narily not dangerous to life; although sometimes at- 
tacks which look like a simple faint are the result of 
serious disease of the heart or brain. The fainting 
person suddenly becomes pale, loses consciousness, and 
usually falls, the pulsations of the heart and the move- 
ments of breathing becoming diminished. In a faint, 
the brain is commonly deprived temporarily of its 
proper supply of blood. The individual in the faint 
should be carefully placed flat on the back, and the 
clothing loosened. In some cases it is well to raise 
the body and limbs a little above the level of the 
head; especially is this procedure called for when 
unconsciousness has been produced by a blow or any- 
thing giving rise to a decided shock. In this way the 
circulation will be given the best possible chance to 
right itself. Sprinkling cold water on the face, and 
applying ammonia water to the nostrils and warmth 
to the extremities and over the stomach, will also 
assist in bringing about reaction. 
253. Convulsions.—In convulsions, or “fits,” which 
are usually epileptic, movements calculated to injure 
the person must be controlled. It is useless to 
struggle against such as will do no injury; they had 
better be simply regulated, and no attempt made to 
entirely prevent them; but a folded towel or a piece 
of soft wood may be, when possible, thrust between 
the teeth, to prevent the usual biting of the tongue. 
If the clothing constricts any portion of the body 
sufficiently to interfere with the breathing, or the 
circulation of the blood, it should be loosened. 
When the height of the convulsion is passed, rest in 194 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
the flat position, quiet, and sometimes a moderate 
stimulation, may be required. 
254. Burns or Scalds.—When clothes are on fire, 
the wearer must not run about, but should be made 
to lie down, and should be covered with a rug, or car- 
pet, or shawl, or coat—anything that will exclude the 
air and smother the flame. Afterward, the burned 
part must be disturbed as little as possible, and the 
patient may be enveloped in lint soaked in a mixture 
of equal parts of linseed-oil and lime-water. Stimulants 
and anodynes should be administered. Medical advice 
should always be taken in such grave circumstances, 
Slight burns are best treated by applying a cloth soaked 
in a strong solution of baking soda—the bicarbonate 
of soda. Linseed-oil and lime-water is also a good 
application for such burns. 
255. Sprains.—In a sprain the joint is twisted, 
and its ligaments are stretched or even torn. Sprains 
most frequently occur at the wrist and ankle-joints. 
The injury is rapidly followed by inflammation of the 
joint and adjacent parts, with great pain and often 
swelling. Sprains must be treated by rest, and heat 
or cold, as is best suited to each case. Sprains of the 
finger or wrist usually require cold and moist appli- 
cations. A lotion of lead-water and laudanum is use- 
ful to allay inflammation. To promote absorption of 
any inflammatory products that may be left, painting 
over the joint with tincture of iodine, and rubbing and 
kneading, are useful. 
256. Foreign Bodies in the Eye.—Particles of 
cinder, dust, or fragments of metal often get into the HINTS ON HYGIENE. 
195 
eye and cause trouble. A good plan is to hold a 
knitting-needle, or thin lead-pencil, over the upper 
lid; then, while the person looks, or turns his eye 
downward, seize the lashes of that lid by the fingers 
of the disengaged hand, and gently turn the lid up- 
ward and backward over the needle or pencil. Usually 
the intruder can be seen and removed. Should the 
foreign body be imbedded in the eyeball or the eyelid, 
the case should be left to a surgeon. The foreign 
body often cannot be seen, but the person assures us 
that he feels it. Often he does not really feel the 
body, but the roughness left by it. In such a case, 
or even if the body has been seen and removed, a 
soothing application to the injury is as useful as the 
same thing applied to a wound of the hand. A good 
eyewash is made by dissolving eight grains of borax 
in a mixture of one-half ounce of infusion of sassafras, 
and one ounce and a half of camphor water. Never 
draw a handkerchief, or anything else, between the 
eyelids to remove a foreign body. W e know of one 
case in which the sight was almost destroyed as the 
result of an inflammation set up by dragging the for- 
eign body across the eyeball in this way. In fact, it 
is better not to meddle with the eye at all if a physi- 
cian can possibly be secured. 
257. Insects in the Ear.—Insects sometimes get 
into the ear. The best way of getting them out is to 
till the cavity of the ear with sweet-oil or glycerine. It 
drowns the animal by closing up its breathing pores, 
and in a short time it floats to the surface of the fluid 
used. The tube of the ear is somewhat curved, and 196 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
when straightened by catching hold of the upper tip, 
and gently pulling it upward toward the crown of the 
head, the liquid flows in more readily. 
258. Foreign Bodies in the Throat.—Foreign 
bodies sometimes get lodged in the throat. A crust 
of bread, or a bone, or some other object, may be 
lodged where it can be reached, when it is best re- 
moved with the fingers. Forceps may be used if at 
hand. If a piece of food is caught in the windpipe, 
owing to the epiglottis not shutting down quickly 
enough, usually it will be coughed out. If, how- 
ever, it remains, an effort should be made to re- 
move it with the fingers, and a physician should be 
called at once. Tickling the ear with a feather, or 
slapping the back with the hand, will sometimes excite 
coughing. 
259. Foreign Bodies in the Nose.—If a foreign 
body, such as a pebble or grain of coffee, gets into a 
nostril, the first thing to do is to try to expel it by 
gently blowing the nose. The nose should never be 
blown violently, for this may set up inflammation of 
the middle ear, and greatly impair the hearing. If 
ordinary blowing does not succeed, the child should 
be made to take a full breath; then closing the other 
nostril and the mouth, when the lungs empty them- 
selves by expiration the foreign body may be driven 
out of the nostril. If it should not be expelled by 
either of these methods, a physician must be called. 
260. Bleeding from the Nose.—Bleeding from 
the nose can usually be stopped by application of cold 
water or ice to the outside and inside of the nostrils; 197 
HINTS ON HYGIENE. 
but sometimes the bleeding is profuse and obstinate. 
Vinegar, or a strong solution of alum in warm water, 
can be snuffed up the nose ; or cotton, soaked in vinegar 
or alum-water, may be used as a plug. The bleeding 
may frequently be stopped by pressing the finger with 
moderate firmness over the upper portion of the upper 
lip to the outer side of the nostril from which the 
blood proceeds. A small, hard roll of paper passed 
well up beneath the upper lip in the same situation is 
often sufficient. Water as hot as can be borne, carried 
into the bleeding nostril by gentle efforts at inspira- 
tion, while the mouth and opposite nostril are closed, 
in many cases is promptty effectual. Do not blow the 
nose during or soon after the bleeding; keep the mouth 
shut, and breathe through the nose. 
261. Bleeding from Wounds.—Capillary hemor- 
rhage follows every cut. The color of the blood is 
bright red; the flow is generally slow and not very 
considerable. It usually stops of itself. If it does 
not, cold water, ice, or vinegar may be applied. For 
oozing from a large raw surface, a towel may be folded, 
dipped in water as hot as the hand can bear, lightly 
squeezed, so as not to drip, and laid upon the bleeding 
surface. Bleeding from the veins is also generally slow 
and steady, the blood being of a darker color. The 
application of cold and continuous pressure upon and 
below the wound are the proper methods of treatment. 
Hemorrhage from the arteries is very dangerous. In 
such a case the blood is bright red, and spurts in a stream 
or leaps in jets from the divided vessel. For wounds 
of the arteries of the hand, raising the hand above 198 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
the head, and making firm pressure with the thumbs 
just above and in front of the wrist, will usually stop 
the bleeding. If this fails, and for wounds below the 
elbow, first grasp the upper part of the arm with both 
hands and squeeze as hard as possible; then let some 
one make a thick, hard knot, as big as an egg, in the 
middle of a handkerchief, place it over the middle of 
the front of the arm, immediately above the elbow, 
tie the ends tight at the back, and bend the forearm 
up so as to press hard against the knot. This, if 
successfully done, will obstruct the main bloodvessel, 
which in this place lies in the middle line of the bend 
of the elbow. For wounds in the upper arm, a knot 
as big as a fist may be made in any piece of cloth, and 
shoved hard up into the armpit, and the elbow then 
brought straight down and held firmly against the side 
of the chest. The principal object is to obstruct the 
bloodvessel above the cut, and this can be effected 
by a knot placed, in the several cases, in front of the 
bend of the elbow, in the armpit; or for the lower 
extremity, behind the bend of the knee, or just below 
the groin, against which the nearest part of the limb 
is to be firmly pressed. 
262. Poisons in General.—Some knowledge of 
poisons and of the substances used to counteract their 
effects (antidotes) will frequently save valuable lives. 
Many poisonous substances are in common use as med- 
icines, for domestic purposes, or in the mechanic arts. 
Bottles or packages containing poisons should be care- 
fully labelled and kept out of the way of children. 
When a poison has been swallowed, it is a good plan HINTS ON HYGIENE. 
199 
to empty the stomach as speedily as possible. Vom- 
iting can be effected by several methods. Simple 
warm water, given cup after cup, is often all that will 
be necessary. A tablespoonful of ground mustard or 
of common salt can be mixed with a large tumblerful 
of water, and this can be given and repeated several 
times until vomiting is produced. After vomiting has 
commenced, warm water, flaxseed tea, or gum-arabic 
water may be given to continue the vomiting and 
soothe the stomach. Fat, oils, milk, raw eggs beaten 
up—all in moderate quantities—are especially valuable 
when the poison has been of an irritant character. If 
the sufferer is much depressed or cold, some stimulant, 
as hot tea, hot coffee, brandy, whiskey, or wine, may 
be administered. Warmth should also be applied. 
263. Different Classes of Poisons.—Poisons can 
be arranged into different classes: some are acids, some 
are alkalies; some are irritant mineral poisons, such 
as arsenic, sugar of lead, corrosive sublimate, tartar 
emetic, phosphorus, and lunar caustic; and some 
are special vegetable poisons, such as strychnia, opium, 
aconite, Jamestown weed, hemlock, nightshade, toad- 
stool, tobacco, etc., etc. Certain general principles of 
treatment apply for all the poisons of each special class. 
Acid Poisons.—The strong acids, such as sulphuric, nitric, and 
muriatic, are violent poisons, and yet are in common use, particu- 
larly in certain mechanical pursuits. The proper treatment for 
poisoning by any of these mineral acids is to give an alkali, as 
magnesia, lime, baking soda, whitewash, chalk, hartshorn mixed 
with plenty of water, etc. Vomiting should be provoked and bland 
liquids given. A little calcined magnesia in a case like this might be 
the means of saving a life. For oxalic acid, lime-water, chalk, white- 200 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
wash, or even plaster crushed and stirred up in water, will answer. 
Carbolic Acid is a substance now much used as a medicine and 
as a disinfectant, and cases of poisoning from it occasionally occur. 
This odor, which is like that of creasote, should serve to put a per- 
son on guard with reference to the substance. Strong carbolic acid 
will corrode or burn the skin. If it should be accidentally poured 
or spilled upon the skin, the bum produced should be treated with 
cooling lotions, oils, or salves, as other burns. Taken internally, 
carbolic acid is a very poisonous substance. Besides the caustic 
or burning effect upon the mucous membrane of the mouth, throat, 
and alimentary canal, it exerts a peculiar effect upon the system, 
which shows itself by nausea or vomiting, sweating, lividity, labored 
breathing, feeble pulse, tremor, and paralysis. A good antidote for 
carbolic acid is the common Epsom salt or sulphate of magnesium. 
In case of poisoning by carbolic acid, therefore, after having tried 
to provoke vomiting, and after giving draughts of oil or milk to 
relieve the burning of the mouth and throat, a large quantity of 
Epsom salt should be dissolved in water and given freely to the 
sufferer. To accomplish the purpose for which it is given, the anti- 
dote must be administered early and in large amounts. 
Alkaline Poisons.—The strong alkalies are ammonia, or harts- 
horn, potash and soda, the latter two usually dissolved in water, 
the solution being generally called lye. Liniments sometimes con- 
tain ammonia, and are swallowed by mistake. Alkalies bum skin 
or mucous membrane rapidly and severely. The proper antidotes 
are mild acids, such as diluted lemon juice or vinegar, which should 
be given in large quantity. 
Arsenic.—When arsenic has been taken, an antidote must be 
administered immediately, if life is to be saved. It can be obtained 
in the following manner: Take tincture of iron or Monsel’s solu- 
tion, and into it pour ammonia-water or some strong alkali; a 
precipitate will be obtained, which should be strained and given 
immediately, with large doses of calcined magnesia. Vomiting 
should be provoked or continued, and a dose of castor-oil should 
be given. Dialyzed iron, a preparation which can now be obtained 
from any drug-store, may be given in tablespoonful doses, following 
each dose by a tablespoonful of common salt in a teacupful of 
water. Paris green is an arsenical preparation. HINTS ON HYGIENE. 
201 
Sugar of Lead—For poisoning by sugar of lead, to produce 
vomiting, give Epsom salt, milk, eggs, and castor-oil. 
Corrosive Sublimate.—Corrosive sublimate dissolved in whiskey 
is an article frequently used.to destroy vermin. If it should be 
swallowed by mistake, the stomach should be emptied by means 
of mild emetics; plenty of eggs and flour in soothing drinks should 
be given, and, later, sweet-oil. To relieve pain, and strengthen, 
opium in some form, and whiskey might also be required. 
Tartar Emetic.—By mistake, an overdose of tartar emetic may 
be administered. A strong decoction of good green tea, or oak 
bark, if taken soon, will change the tartar emetic into a harmless 
compound. 
Phosphorus.—Phosphorus is sometimes sucked from matches by 
children. It is a poison which acts slowly, and affords ample time 
for securing medical advice; but five-grain doses of sulphate of 
copper, dissolved in water, may be given at intervals of ten min- 
utes, until vomiting comes on. Then a dose of magnesia should be 
administered, but no fat oil. 
Lunar Caustic.—Lunar caustic is sometimes swallowed. The 
antidote for this is a very strong solution of salt and water given 
again and again; and vomiting should be provoked until the vom- 
ited matters cease to have a look like thin milk. 
Copper.—Vessels of copper often give rise to poisoning. Though 
the metal undergoes but little change in a dry atmosphere, it is 
rusted if acids be present, and its surface becomes covered with a 
green substance—one of the salts of copper,—a poisonous compound. 
It has sometimes happened that a mother has, from want of knowl- 
edge, thus poisoned her family. For poisoning with copper, milk, 
eggs, or baking soda should be given. 
Nux Vomica, or Strychnia.—For poisoning by nux vomica, or 
strychnia, use emetics or stomach-pump; chloral hydrate and bro- 
mide of potassium in large doses; chloroform to relieve spasm of 
glottis; stimulants, if needed; and morphia in one-half grain doses, 
repeated if necessary. 
Opium.—Opium, and its preparations, such as laudanum, pare- 
goric, black drop, many quack-medicines sold as soothing-syrups, 
etc., when taken in poisonous amounts, cause deep sleep, with 
narrowing of the pupil of the eye to a small circle, which does not 202 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
enlarge in the dark. Emetics must be used promptly and persist- 
ently, and frequent vomiting produced. Strong coffee must be 
freely given as a stimulant. So long as the breathing does not 
fall below ten to the minute, there is no immediate danger of 
death; but opium is a treacherous poison, and requires all the skill 
that can be obtained to combat it. The important matter is to 
keep up the breathing. If an electrical battery can be obtained 
and used, it is the best thing that can be done. The next is to 
lay the patient upon a lounge and slap his skin with the back of 
a broad brush or with a slipper. This is all the rousing that is 
necessary, so long as the breathing keeps above ten to the minute. 
Should it fall below this, or if the breathing should cease, artificial 
respiration should be employed. 
Special Vegetable Poisons.—Aconite, hemlock, deadly night- 
shade, the Jamestown weed, monk’s-hood, toadstools, and tobacco, 
in poisonous doses, all produce deep depression, and persons poi- 
soned by them must be treated with vomiting, followed by stimu- 
lation and warmth. 
Questions for Review. 
How often should the whole body he washed ? 
What is the least that one can do with any attention to cleanliness 
or health ? 
Describe the best process for a thorough wash of the hands. 
How often should a hot bath be taken ? 
What is said about the use of a flesh-brush or rough towel ? 
When should the teeth be brushed ? 
How should the hair be combed and brushed at night ? 
When should the mouth be rinsed out ? 
Should tooth-brushes be soft or hard ? Why ? 
What is said about pomade? 
What is said about oiling the hair ? 
How may sweet-oil be of service to the body ? 
Should hot fluids be drunk ? 
How should sweets, tarts, pastry, confectionery, and sugar be used? 
What should be done to the clothes before going to bed ? 
What should be done to the bed and bedroom in the morning ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
203 
What should always be done before sitting down to breakfast ? 
When and how should those sick with fever, or any infectious dis- 
ease, be visited ? 
What precaution should be taken to avoid infection or any low 
fever ? 
Mention some good disinfectants and the methods of using them. 
How should cold feet at night be treated ? 
Why should hot and heavy suppers be avoided? 
What does going to bed with an entirely empty stomach often 
cause ? 
Mention some good rules of hygiene for those troubled with sleep- 
lessness. 
To what is the word asphyxia now commonly applied ? 
What is the derivation of the word ? 
In asphyxia, what happens to the tidal air ? 
Mention some of the ways in which asphyxia is produced. 
How may death be prevented in cases of asphyxia? 
Describe what should be done in apparent drowning. 
Name some of the noxious gases which may produce asphyxia. 
What is the treatment for asphyxia or suffocation from noxious 
gases ? 
How may risk of poisoning from noxious gases be obviated ? 
What two conditions may be produced by intense heat? 
By what is sunstroke decidedly favored ? 
What are the symptoms of heatstroke or sunstroke ? 
What treatment should be adopted for a person attacked with sun- 
stroke ? 
How should a case of heat-exhaustion be treated ? 
Is an attack of fainting ordinarily dangerous to life? 
Describe a faint. 
What happens to the brain in a faint ? 
What should be done to the individual in a faint ? 
What movements should be controlled in a case of convulsions ? 
What are the suggestions with reference to the treatment of a 
convulsion ? 
When clothes are on fire, what should the wearer do ? 
Afterward, how should the burned part be treated? 
What should be given internally ? 
How are slight burns best treated ? 
What is the condition in a sprain ? 204 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
Where do sprains most frequently occur? 
By what is the injury followed ? 
How should sprains be treated ? 
What is a good plan for removing foreign bodies from beneath the 
eyelids ? 
What advice is given when the foreign body is imbedded in the 
eyeball or eyelid ? 
What should be done for the irritation remaining after the removal 
of a foreign body? 
How can a good eye-wash be made ? 
Should a handkerchief ever be drawn between the eyelids to re- 
move a foreign body ? 
What is the best method of getting an insect out of the ear ? 
Mention some of the methods of removing foreign bodies from the 
throat. 
Mention some of the methods of removing foreign bodies from the 
nose. 
How can bleeding from the nose usually be stopped ? 
If the bleeding is profuse and obstinate, how may it be stopped ? 
What sort of hemorrhage follows every cut ? 
If capillary hemorrhage does not stop of itself, how may it be con- 
trolled ? 
How can bleeding from the veins be controlled ? 
What is the most dangerous form of hemorrhage ? 
How can bleeding from wounds of the arteries of the hand usually 
be stopped ? 
Give the methods of controlling arterial hemorrhage from wounds 
below the elbow. 
Give the methods for wounds in the upper arm, and for wounds in 
the lower extremities. 
What are antidotes ? 
When a poison has been swallowed, what should be done at once ? 
How can vomiting be effected ? 
After vomiting has commenced, what should be given ? 
What are especially valuable when the poison has been of an irri- 
tant character ? 
What should be done if the sufferer is much depressed or cold ? 
Name some of the classes into which poisons can be arranged. 
What is the proper treatment for the strong mineral acid poisons ? 
What is the treatment for oxalic acid poisoning ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
205 
How will strong carbolic acid act on the skin ? 
How should a burn produced by it be treated ? 
What is a good antidote for carbolic acid? 
Hive the entire plan of treatment in poisoning by carbolic acid. 
Mention some of the alkaline poisons. 
What are the proper antidotes for alkaline poisons ? 
Describe the method of making an antidote for arsenic. 
What should be done besides administering an antidote ? 
What is the name of a common arsenical preparation ? 
For poisoning by sugar of lead, what should be done ? 
Give the treatment for corrosive sublimate poisoning. 
Give the treatment for tartar emetic poisoning. 
How are children sometimes poisoned by phosphorus? 
How should such cases be treated ? 
What is the antidote for lunar caustic ? 
How do vessels of copper often give rise to poisoning ? 
For poisoning with copper, what should be given? 
What is the treatment for poisoning by nux vomica, or strychnia? 
What are some of the preparations of opium ? 
What symptoms are caused by opium preparations when taken in 
poisonous amounts? 
What is the treatment for opium poisoning ? 
What symptoms are produced by poisonous doses of aconite, hem- 
lock, deadly nightshade, the Jamestown weed, monk’s-hood, toad- 
stools, and tobacco ? 
How should persons poisoned by these substances be treated ? ALCOHOL, TOBACCO, 
AND OTHER 
1ST ARC OTIC S. 
NOTE.—In the preceding chapters the subjects of “Alcohol, Tobacco, 
and other Narcotics,” and their effects on the human system, have 
been presented in connection with the Physiology and Hygiene of 
the different organs. In the following chapter we have brought to- 
gether the various paragraphs treating of alcohol, etc., and present them 
in logical, methodical order, arranged for a general review of the subject. “At the last it biteth like a serpent and sting- 
eth like an adder.” 
208 CHAPTER XIX. 
ALCOHOL, TOBACCO, AND OTHER 
NARCOTICS * 
264. Stimulants and Narcotics.—The word stim- 
ulant is derived from the Latin, stimulus, a “spur” or 
“ goad.” A stimulant is a substance which has the 
power to excite or increase the force of the nervous 
system. The word narcotic is derived from a Greek 
verb, narkon, which means to “benumb” or “deaden.” 
A narcotic is a deadening agent which diminishes the 
activity of the nervous system; and narcosis, the 
condition which results from the use of narcotics, 
is a more or less complete paralysis of the nervous 
system. Alcohol, tobacco, absinthe, opium, Indian 
hemp, and some other substances, are stimulants when 
used in small quantities, and narcotics in large quan- 
* In the preparation of this chapter we have made use of the follow- 
ing works: The Cantor Lectures on Alcohol, For and Against Tobacco, 
and The Field of Disease, by Dr. B. W. Richardson; Stimulants and 
Narcotics, by Dr. Francis E. Anstie; Smoking and Drinking, by James 
Parton : A Manual of Practical Hygiene, by Dr. Edmund A. Parkes; 
An Inquiry into the Prescription of Intoxicating Liquors, etc., by F. R. 
Lees; The Use and Abuse of Tobacco, by John Lizars; An Address 
on the Effects of Alcoholic Drinks, by J. Estabrook, President of the 
Michigan State Teachers’ Association, etc. 210 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
tities. Their abuse has brought terrible evils upon 
the human race. They have certain uses, but only 
physicians, and those who have a thorough scientific 
knowledge of their actions, are competent to say when 
and how they should be used. Their dangers are 
so real and numerous, and they are the cause of so 
much misery and misfortune, that every one should 
be familiar with their injurious and deadly proper- 
ties. 
265. Derivation of the Word Alcohol. — The 
word Alcohol is derived from the Arabic, al-kahol, 
which means “ something very subtle.” It was used, 
originally, to designate a fine powder with which East- 
ern women were in the habit of staining their hair 
and eye-lids in order, as they thought, to add to their 
charms. The same name was given after a time to 
other subtle powders, and later by Europeans to the 
spirits of wine. 
266. Fermentation and Distillation.—The term 
fermentation is applied to the peculiar change which 
sometimes takes place when moist animal or vege- 
table matter is exposed to the air at ordinary tem- 
peratures. Some forms of vegetable matter have 
an especial tendency to ferment. The juice of the 
apple is at first sweet, but after it has stood for a 
time it works, or ferments, and becomes “hard 
cider,” which has a sharp taste and contains alco- 
hol. Alcohol can be obtained by fermentation not 
only from the juice of fruits, such as the apple, 
pear, peach, and grape, but also from seeds, grain, and 
other sources. The substances which yield alcohol ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
211 
contain sugar, and it is really from the fermentation 
of sugar that the alcohol is derived. By fermenta- 
tion alcohol is formed, but when thus made it is often 
impure. Distillation, from the Latin stillo, meaning 
to “drop little by little,” is a process of separating 
the pure alcohol from other substances. 
267. Alcoholic Beverages.—Intoxicating liquors 
owe their specific intoxicating properties to alcohol. 
Wine is the fermented juice of the grape. Wines con- 
tain from seven to twenty per cent, of pure alcohol. 
Beer is made of malt, water, and hops. Ale, stout, 
lager, and porter are varieties of beer. The amount 
of alcohol contained in beer varies from four to ten 
per cent. Many beer drinkers seem to think that 
they are not taking alcohol, or not in quantities that 
can do any harm. Beer is harmful in proportion to 
the amount of it taken and because of the alcohol it 
contains. Hard cider is the fermented juice of apples 
and contains about five per cent, of alcohol. Whiskey 
is obtained by distilling grain or potatoes; gin, from 
fermented corn and juniper berries; rum, from the 
refuse of sugar and molasses; brandy, from the juice 
of the grape or other fruit. Whiskey, gin, rum, and 
brandy contain from fifty to sixty per cent, of alcohol. 
Alcohol is also the chief ingredient of the “ bitters ” 
and of many other “ quack medicines ” so largely used. 
They are alcoholic beverages in their most dangerous 
and insidious form. 
268. Uses of Alcohol in Science and Medicine. 
—Like many other substances which are poisonous 
and deadly when improperly employed, in its proper 212 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
place alcohol has a field of great usefulness. The 
“spirit-lamp,” in which alcohol is the burning fluid, 
is one of the most useful of inventions. In burning, 
alcohol gives forth no smoke nor soot, and yet evolves 
considerable heat, hence the advantages of this lamp. 
Alcohol prevents organic substances from decay; hence, 
it is used by scientists to preserve specimens. It is also 
employed to harden specimens so that they can be 
cut into thin sections for microscopical examination. 
Ether, chloroform, and other most precious sleep-pro- 
ducing agents have been derived from alcohol. Spirit 
lotions, consisting of alcohol and water, are often use- 
ful in external swellings and wastings. When the 
system is much reduced, alcohol may be of service, 
but its use should be directed by physicians. 
269. Medical Conclusions about Alcohol.—At 
the International Medical Congress which met in Phila- 
delphia, in 1876, Dr. Ezra M. Hunt, of New Jersey, 
read a paper on alcohol. The chief conclusions of 
Dr. Hunt’s paper were as follows: 1. Alcohol is 
not shown to have any definite value as food. 2. 
Its use as a medicine is chiefly that of a stimulant, 
and it can often be substituted by something else. 
8. The purity of alcoholic liquors is, in general, not 
as well assured as that of articles used for medicines 
should be. The American Medical Association, an 
assemblage of physicians from all parts of the United 
States, in 1883 adopted a series of resolutions, stat- 
in o- their conviction that “ alcohol should be classed 
O 
with other powerful drugs; that when prescribed 
medically, it should be done with conscientious cau- ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
213 
tion and a sense of great responsibility; that used as 
a beverage it is productive of a large amount of 
physical and mental disease; that it entails diseased 
and enfeebled constitutions upon offspring, and is the 
cause of a large percentage of the crime and pauperism 
of our large cities and country.” 
270. Alcohol in Relation to Cold and Heat.— 
Alcoholic drinks are often taken in the winter with 
the idea that they assist nature in resisting cold, and 
in summer to counteract the effects of heat. The 
testimony of science is against the practice. Dr. 
Hayes, the Arctic explorer, not only did not use 
alcohol himself, but on one of his voyages would take 
no man accustomed to use it. An increase of tem- 
perature occurs at first after taking alcohol, but subse- 
quently it-rapidly decreases. Dr. Eichardson placed 
alcohol and cold side by side in experiment, and deter- 
mined that the great reduction of animal temperature 
is one of the most pressing causes in death from alco- 
hol. According to Parkes, the greatest fatigues 
both in hot and cold climates have been best borne 
by men who use no alcohol. Sir John Hall, an Eng- 
lish general, says that the healthiest army he ever 
served with had not a single drop of alcohol. Dr. 
Livingstone, the celebrated African explorer, in 1862, 
wrote that he had lived on the principle of total absti- 
nence during more than twenty years. He said, further, 
“ The most severe labors or privations may be under- 
gone without alcoholic stimulants, because those of us 
who have endured the most had nothing else than 
water, and not always enough of that.” 214 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
271. Poisonous Action of Alcohol.—That alcohol 
may and frequently does act as a poison has been repeat- 
edly demonstrated. The word intoxication is derived 
from the Latin word, toxicum., which means a “ poison.” 
Toxicum is itself derived from a Greek word meaning 
a bow or an arrow, it being the custom of the barba- 
rians to poison the latter. Strong alcohol when taken 
in large quantities will produce narcosis and death. 
Alcohol, absinthe, opium, etc., are not only injurious 
in themselves, but used once the appetite for them 
grows. Used in small quantities at first, after a time 
larger quantities become necessary to produce the 
same effects. They lead their victims on and on to ruin. 
272. Early Symptoms of the Injurious Effects 
of Alcohol.—Frequent headaches, sleepless hours, un- 
pleasant dreams, morbid feelings, and a sense of lan- 
guor and depression are some of the symptoms present 
in the case of the drinker who first begins to use al- 
cohol to excess. The work of physical deterioration 
thus indicated is accompanied by a gradual weakening 
of the will, causing disastrous results. 
273. Some Special Forms of Alcohol Poisoning. 
—Alcohol causes drunkenness or intoxication, sudden 
alcoholic coma, mania a potu, and delirium tremens. 
The drunkard, with his foul breath, his noisy tongue, 
his foolish or dangerous acts, his bloated face, and reel- 
ing gait, is in many communities an every-day warning 
to young and old of the sad effects of drink. Coma 
is a profound state of unconsciousness. When a large 
amount of alcohol is taken in a short time, the per- 
son will sometimes drop down instantly, and will be ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
215 
found unconscious and insensible, cold to the touch, 
blue in the face, covered with sweat, breathing heavily, 
and with a feeble, frequent pulse, and sometimes con- 
vulsed. Many such patients die. Mania a potu, or 
mania from drink, is a form of wild excitement and 
fury which comes on suddenly as the direct result of al- 
coholic excess. Delirium tremens is the result of the 
excessive use of alcohol, or of suddenly stopping its use 
after it has been taken for a long time to excess. The 
disease begins with restlessness, sleeplessness, tremor, 
and depression of spirits, and often with disturbances 
of the pulse, heart, and stomach. Later the patient 
mutters to himself, talks wildly, or screams with fright. 
He imagines that he sees about him fiends, snakes, 
rats, or frightful monsters. He hears terrible voices. 
He is pursued by foes. Completely exhausted, he 
dies, or recovers only after a severe illness. 
274. Alcohol and Insanity.—The long-continued 
use of alcohol may give rise to various chronic forms 
of insanity. Dementia, or great mental enfeeblement, 
melancholia, or depression of the faculties of the mind, 
and its opposite, mania, or mental excitement, may be 
caused by alcohol. Alcohol also gives rise to a special 
form of chronic insanity, in which strange and dan- 
gerous delusions are present. Dipsomania, or “thirst- 
mania,” from dipsa, “ thirst,” is a term applied to that 
condition in which an individual has a constant crav- 
ing for alcoholic drinks. Dr. Norman Kerr * holds 
that intemperance is a cause of insanity, and insanity 
is a cause of intemperance. Dr. Edgar Shepherd says 
* American Psychological Journal, April, 1883. 216 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
that, directly and indirectly, forty per cent, of British 
insanity springs from drink. On the other hand, the 
defective nervous organization of the insane, is apt to 
render those of an unsound mind an easy prey to 
alcohol. 
275. Effect of Alcohol on the Muscular Sys- 
tem.—Alcohol taken in excess injures the muscular 
system both directly and indirectly. It leads sometimes 
to what is called “ fatty degeneration.” The fibres of 
flesh which form the muscles change one by one to 
fat. The muscles become weak, flabby, aod wasted. 
Even the heart, which is a muscular organ, becomes 
affected in this way, resulting in “ fatty degeneration 
of the heart,” one of the most serious and fatal of dis- 
eases. Indirectly, alcohol causes loss of muscular con- 
trol. Every muscular movement is in some degree 
under the control of the nervous system. Alcohol 
impairs the nervous control of the muscles. This 
impairment is seen not only in the thick tongue, wan- 
dering eyes, and staggering gait of the drunkard, but 
also in a feeble and trembling condition well known 
to physicians as “ alcoholic tremor,” which affects the 
limbs more or less permanently. 
276. Physical Endurance not Increased by Al- 
cohol.—Alcohol does not enable us to endure either 
short and severe physical efforts or long-continued 
trials of endurance. Men who row, or run races, or 
take part iu other athletic contests, do not resort to 
alcoholic stimulants either when in training or at the 
time of their contests. Experience has shown that 
alcohol is worse than useless in such cases. Weston, ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
217 
a pedestrian and total abstainer, performed one of the 
most wonderful feats of physical endurance on record. 
He agreed to walk fifty miles a day for one hundred 
consecutive days. He completed the walk success- 
fully with some miles to spare, demonstrating that a 
resort to intoxicating stimulants is not essential to the 
accomplishment of severe and long-continued bodily 
exertion. 
277. Effect of Alcohol on the Brain and its 
Membranes.—The brain and its membranes are sup- 
plied with blood-vessels in the greatest abundance. 
Any substance absorbed into the blood soon penetrates 
to every nook and corner of the brain, upon which it 
acts with intensity. Congestions of the brain are 
thus caused by the temporary use of alcohol. Its 
long-continued use leads to changes in the substance 
of the brain, which degenerates and often hardens. 
The inner membrane of the brain, or pia mater, as 
the result of frequent congestions, loses its clearness, 
and becomes milky-white or amber-colored. Both this 
membrane and the outer membrane, or dura mater, 
may become thickened. Some authorities say that a 
brain once thoroughly overcome by alcohol is never 
again what it was before. Dr. Percy, a British phy- 
sician,* injected two ounces and a half of alcohol into 
the stomach of a dog, which caused its almost instant 
death. He removed the animal’s brain, subjected it 
to distillation, and obtained a surprising quantity of 
alcohol, which seemed to have rushed to the brain. 
278. Different Stages in the Action of Alcohol 
* Quoted by Parton. 218 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
on the Nervous System.—Dr. Kichardson describes 
the acute effects of excessive amounts of alcohol as 
occurring in four stages. (1.) The first stage is one 
of excitement—the face flushes, the eye brightens, and 
conversation becomes louder and freer. This effect 
is due to the impairment of the nervous control, the 
result of the alcohol. The heart beats more rapidly, 
because the resistance offered by the capillary blood- 
vessels to the current of blood is diminished. (2.) In 
the second stage, the function of the spinal cord is 
influenced. The spinal centres control pure automatic 
acts—those acts which proceed systematically, even 
when we are not thinking about them. These now 
cease to be correctly carried on. The movements of 
the individual become uncertain and unsteady. The 
nervous control of certain of the muscles is lost, and 
the nervous stimulus is more or less enfeebled. (3.) In 
the third stage, the cerebral or brain centres become 
influenced; they are reduced in power, and the con- 
trolling influences of will and of judgment are lost. 
The reason is now off' duty, or is fooling with duty, 
and all the mere animal instincts and sentiments are 
laid bare. The coward shows up more craven, the 
braggart more boastful, the cruel more merciless, the 
untruthful more false, the carnal more degraded. 
(4.) Finally, in the fourth stage, the action of the alcohol 
still extending, the superior brain centres are overpow- 
ered ; the senses are beclouded, the voluntary muscular 
prostration is perfected, sensibility is lost, and the body 
lies a mere log, dead by all but one-fourth, on which alone 
its life hangs. The heart still remains true to its duty, 
and while it just lives it feeds the breathing power. ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
219 
279. Nervous Derangements produced by Alco- 
hol.—Epileptic convulsions, some forms of paralysis, 
and neuralgias, or painful affections of the nerves, are 
sometimes attributable to alcohol. Hysteria is fre- 
quent among those who use alcohol, although it is 
more frequently produced by other causes. Such 
patients suffer from great emotional excitement, laugh- 
ing or crying by turns, may have violent spasms, are 
exceedingly sensitive and irritable, and generally be- 
come a nuisance to themselves and others. Alcohol 
may also cause sleeplessness. It does this largely by 
the unhealthy state of the circulation which it induces. 
280. Effect of Alcohol on the Eye.—Alcohol, 
used as a drink, often produces chronic congestion or 
inflammation of the eye and delicate lining meiiibrane 
of the lid. A disease well known to physicians, called 
Amblyopia potatorum, or “feebleness of sight of drink- 
ers,” often results. In this condition, if drink is per- 
sisted in, nutritive and structural changes take place 
in the eye, and the optic nerve, which conducts to the 
brain the impressions formed on the retina, wastes 
away, and the case is hopeless. 
281. Sleep Produced by Alcohol and other 
Narcotics. — While alcohol will sometimes cause 
wakefulness and unrest, in other cases, particularly if 
taken in large quantities, it produces heavy, stupor- 
ous sleep. This sleep, however, is not of the kind 
that restores “tired nature.” Instead of arousing 
from “alcoholic sleep” refreshed and strengthened, 
the individual awakens with disordered digestion 
and headache, and in a state of nervous irritability. 220 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
His sleep is not that which comes naturally as the 
result of physiological fatigue, but is due rather to 
the action of a deadening agent introduced into the 
blood upon the nerve centres. The sleep produced 
by alcohol, or other drugs, such as opium and chloral, 
is never as beneficial as that which comes in the 
natural way. In serious disease, physicians are some- 
times compelled to resort to narcotics to produce 
sleep, but this is only done in extreme cases, and with 
great caution. No one should ever use such narcotics 
except on trustworthy medical advice. The habit of 
using either alcohol or other narcotics to induce sleep 
is fraught with danger to body and mind. 
282. Effect of Alcohol on the Blood and Blood- 
Vessels.—Alcohol disturbs the normal action of the 
different constituents of the blood. The flow of 
blood through the arteries is regulated through the 
sympathetic system of nerves, which is not under the 
influence of the will. Alcohol paralyzes the centres 
which govern these nerves, and the vessels to which 
they gp, become over-dilated. In confirmed drinkers 
a chronic dilatation often remains, and is shown by the 
persistent redness of the face, and especially of the 
nose. The blood-vessels, particularly the arteries, 
are liable to disease from the abuse of drink. Some- 
times an artery becomes quite rigid; its elasticity 
and its power of expansion and contraction are de- 
stroyed. These changes throw more work on the 
heart, and cause it to degenerate in structure. Dr. 
Parkes calculated that the free consumption of alco- 
holic liquors easily added twenty per cent, of addi- ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
221 
tional work to the heart’s normal task. The heart is 
excited and spurred to a rapid, unnatural gait. 
283. Effect of Alcohol on the Heart.—The ac- 
tion of the heart is governed or regulated by a nerve- 
centre or centres. When the governing region is in 
a healthy condition, the heart has a certain stroke and 
rhythm, by virtue of which it does its work of pumping 
the blood to all parts of the body in a quiet, uniform way. 
Alcohol exerts a paralyzing influence on these nerve- 
centres. The heart is no longer healthfully controlled, 
because the centres have lost their tone. Under these 
circumstances, the heart has been compared to a steam- 
engine without a governor—its action is quickened for 
a time. Soon it becomes feeble from overwork. 
284. Effect of Alcohol on the Liver.—When 
alcohol has been taken into the stomach and absorbed, 
it passes almost directly to the liver. Various affec- 
tions of the liver are caused by the abuse of alcohol. 
Sometimes it is congested and enlarged. In the course 
of time it may become fatty, or shrunken and hard- 
ened. The liver of the confirmed drinker is probably 
never free from the influence of the poison; it is too 
often saturated with it. The prolonged use of alco- 
holic drinks is the most frequent cause of cirrhosis of 
the liver—a form of chronic inflammation of this 
organ of the most serious character. So frequently is 
this disease dependent upon the irritant action of alco- 
hol, that it is commonly known as “gin-drinker’s liver,” 
especially among English physicians. The term “ cir- 
rhosis ” comes from a Greek word meaning “ yellow,” 
the cirrhotic liver often having a yellowish appearance 222 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
285. Alcohol not Food.—Food is that which is 
capable of supplying material or tissue, or that which 
produces heat or some other form of force. Such food 
as bread, meat, and potatoes, is taken into the stomach, 
and is digested and transformed into both tissues and 
force; it renews and builds the body, and helps to 
give strength and energy. The Esquimaux, or the 
Arctic explorer, eats large quantities of fat, and yet 
does not become fat himself The fat is a producer 
of heat and force. It is a sort of fuel to the body, 
which is burned up to maintain the bodily heat. It is 
conceded that alcohol is not a food out of which tissues 
are built; and many chemists and physiologists hold 
that it is not even a heat-producer. 
286. Alcohol and Food Contrasted.—Dr. Lees 
strongly contrasts the effects of alcohol and of food as 
follows: “Food is digested; alcohol is not. Food 
warms the body directly or indirectly; alcohol lowers 
the temperature. Food nourishes the body; alcohol 
does not. Food makes blood; alcohol never does any- 
thing more innocent than mixing with it. Food feeds 
the blood-cells; alcohol destroys them. In health, 
food excites to normal action only; alcohol tends to 
inflammation and disease. Food gives force to the 
body; alcohol excites reaction and weakens force.” 
287. Effect of Alcohol on Digestion and the 
Stomach.—Alcohol, except in small quantities, chem- 
ically injures the pepsin and gastric juice, and prevents 
these substances from doing the work in digestion 
assigned to them by nature. A German physician 
named Buchner, as the result of a series of recent 
researches upon the influence of alcohol upon diges- 223 
ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
tion, came to the conclusion that, in the process of 
digestion, alcohol appears to act unfavorably even 
in small quantities. Alcohol not only interferes with 
the pepsin and gastric juice, but, if its use is con- 
tinued, causes irritation and congestion of the mucous 
membrane of the stomach. It may lead to a chronic 
inflammation or catarrh of the stomach and intestines. 
288. Experiments with Alcohol and Gastric 
Juice.—An English physician named Munroe has 
published some experiments to show that alcohol will 
separate pepsin from gastric juice, and thus interfere 
with digestion. Into a bottle he put minced beef, 
gastric juice, and water; into a second, gastric juice 
and alcohol; and into a third, gastric juice and ale. 
He kept the bottles in motion and at the same heat as 
the human stomach, so as to make the experiments 
correspond - as nearly as possible to nature. The re- 
sults obtained indicated that alcohol impaired the 
digesting power of the gastric juice, by separating the 
pepsin from it, as shown in the following table: 
Minced Beef, 
2d Hour. 
4th Hour. 
6th Hour. 
8th Hour. 
10th Hour. 
1st Bottle. 
Gastric juice 
and water. 
Beef 
becomes 
opaque. 
Beef 
separating. 
Beef 
much less 
in quantity. 
Beef 
broken into 
shreds. 
Beef dis- 
solved as in 
soup. 
2d Bottle. 
Gastric juice 
and alcohol. 
No change. 
No change. 
Slight 
coating on 
beef. 
No change. 
Beef solid on 
cooling. 
Pepsin sepa- 
rated from 
the gastric 
juice. 
3d Bottle. 
Gastric juice 
and ale. 
No change. 
Cloudy, 
with coating 
on beef. 
Beef 
partly 
loosened. 
No change. 
Beef not 
digested. 
Pepsin sepa- 
rated from 
the gastric 
juice. 224 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
289. Effect of Alcohol on the Lungs.—The lungs 
probably suffer more than we at present know, from 
the acute evils imposed by alcohol. Their vessels 
are easily relaxed by alcohol; and as they, of all parts, 
are most susceptible to heat and cold, they are readily 
congested. Fatal congestions of the lungs frequently 
occur among confirmed drinkers, especially in very 
cold weather. Dr. Richardson has described a pecu- 
liar form of consumption occurring among drunkards, 
which is extremely fatal. In the regular course of 
the circulation, alcohol in the blood passes through 
the lungs. It can be smelled on the breath of those 
who drink. The lungs endeavor to get rid of it 
by expiration, and are to some extent weakened 
and enfeebled by the effort. The air-cells as well as 
the vessels of the lungs may be injured by alcohol. 
290. Effect of Alcohol on the Kidneys.—The 
kidneys suffer greatly from the continued influence 
of alcohol. Their minute structure undergoes fatty 
changes; their vessels lose elasticity and power of 
contraction; or their membranes permit that impor- 
tant constituent of the blood which is known as albu- 
men to pass through them. The body loses power as 
it is thus gradually drained. The serious affection 
known as “Bright’s disease of the kidneys” often 
results from the use of alcoholic drinks. 
291. Effect of Alcohol on Dogs.—Dogs whose 
food has been mixed with alcohol, if fed in this way a 
long time, become restless and melancholy. Accord- 
ing to Magnan, they have hallucinations; thinking ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
225 
themselves pursued, they run off affrighted, howling 
and snapping at the empty air. 
292. Hereditary Diseases produced by Alcohol. 
—Dipsomania may be inherited, and many other 
hereditary diseases can be traced to alcohol. Epi- 
lepsy, insanity, and paralysis frequently occur in the 
descendants of those who have been addicted to drink. 
293. Vice and Crime the Result of Alcohol.— 
Not only are vicious aud criminal acts often com- 
mitted by individuals excited and unstrung by recent 
indulgence in alcohol, but its continual use in excess 
undermines the moral nature of the inebriate. He 
loses all sense of right and wrong. Reason and self- 
control are permanently impaired. 
294. Inebriates Succumb Quickly to Acute Dis- 
eases.—It is a matter of common observation among 
physicians, that inebriates, when attacked by some 
serious acute disease, such as pneumonia and typhoid 
fever, are more likely to die than the temperate. 
Alcohol has sapped their resisting power. It is 
difficult for the doctor to know how far to push sup- 
porting measures in these cases. In large city hos- 
pitals, which usually contain many victims of the 
alcohol habit, the mortality from such diseases is 
much greater than in private practice.* 
* “ When yellow fever prevailed in Memphis, it was noted that it 
found its earliest and most constant victims among those who were 
habituated to the use of alcoholic drinks. During the cholera epi- 
demic in Glasgow, in 1832, a physician states that only 19 per cent, 
of the temperate perished, while 91 per cent, of the intemperate were 
swept away. In the same year, out of 1000 persons who died in 226 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
295. Alcohol Shortens Life.—The abuse of alco- 
holic liquors shortens life. Statistics show that for 
every ten temperate persons who die between the ages 
of twenty-one and thirty, fifty-one intemperate per- 
sons die. The mortality of the intemperate is, there- 
fore, five times greater than that of the temperate. 
296. History of the Use of Tobacco.—In 1492, 
Columbus beheld at Cuba the natives smoking cigars. 
This seems to have been the first knowledge of to- 
bacco gained by Europeans. Tobacco was not at once 
brought from America to Europe. In 1559, Hernan- 
dez de Toledo introduced it into Spain and Portugal. 
In 1560, Jean Nicot, French ambassador to Portugal, 
made a report to his sovereign about it. An English- 
man named Raphelengi, who had accustomed himself 
to smoking tobacco in Virginia, introduced the prac- 
tice into England. Sir Walter Raleigh began to use 
the pipe after the return of Sir Francis Drake from 
America in 1586. 
297. Derivation of the Word “Tobacco.”—The 
word tobacco is supposed by some to have been derived 
from Tabaca, the name of a province in St. Domingo, 
where a Spanish monk recognized the plant a few 
years after the discovery of America. According to 
others, it was derived from tabac, a name applied by 
Montreal, only two were teetotalers. Of the 366 persons above 16 
years of age carried off by the cholera at Albany, all but four be- 
longed to the drinking classes; and out of 204 cases in New York, 
only six were temperate, and these recovered, while 122 of the others 
died. While the general death-rate of all the population of England 
is 23 per 1000, it has been ascertained that out of 1000 adult drunk- 
ards of both sexes, 118 die.”—Philadelphia Record. 227 
ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
the natives of the West Indies to the tube, or pipe, 
or roll of leaves which they used in smoking. 
298. Composition of Tobacco Smoke.—Tobacco 
smoke contains watery vapor, free carbon, ammonia, 
carbonic acid, nicotine, a volatile substance having a 
peculiar odor, and a dark, resinous bitter extract. 
299. Effects of the Different Constituents of 
Tobacco.—Symptoms of tremor, palpitation, and pa- 
ralysis, after smoking or chewing, depend on the nic- 
otine. Nicotine is supposed by many to be the only 
source of trouble in tobacco. The bitter extract, 
however, probably produces the vomiting in those 
not used to tobacco. The carbonic acid tends to cause 
headache and drowsiness. The ammonia excites the 
salivary glands, and causes the acrid taste and dryness 
of the mouth and throat of the smoker. 
300. General Physiological Effect of the Use 
of Tobacco.—In small quantities, tobacco may pro- 
duce, for the time, a state of calmness and repose. 
This condition changes to one of nervous restlessness 
and a general feeling of muscular weakness. It some- 
times causes tremor and palpitation. When exces- 
sively used, or when used by one unaccustomed to it, 
dizziness, nausea, vomiting, faintness, and extreme 
weakness often result. 
Upon the young, all injurious drugs act with more 
violence than upon adults. According to Richardson, 
smoking checks the nutrition and the bodily and 
mental development of the young to a serious extent. 
301. Evil Effects of Tobacco on the Young.— 228 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
302. Effect of Tobacco on the Nervous System. 
—Tobacco keeps the nervous system in a continual 
state of irritability and weakness, and causes a craving 
for itself which sometimes amounts to a kind of mental 
disorder. Through the sympathetic nervous system 
tobacco acts on the glandular system, exciting over- 
secretion followed by an impaired secreting power. 
303. Effect of Tobacco on Sight and Hearing.— 
In moderate smokers, the sight is often perplexed; 
in reading, letters become confused, luminous specks 
float before the eyes, and deep-seated pain is felt in 
them. The best evidence that tobacco is acting in- 
juriously on the sense of sight is supplied when there 
is a long retention of images after the eye ceases look- 
ing at objects. This indicates that the retina, or ner- 
vous screen, is becoming affected. The specific effect 
of smoking on the sense of hearing is indicated by a 
confusion of sounds, with a difficulty in appreciating 
sounds that are very soft or unusually loud. 
304. Effect of Tobacco on the Lips, Tongue, 
and Teeth.—Cancer of the lips or tongue has not 
unfrequently been attributed to smoking. A recent 
writer* in a journal devoted to dentistry has shown 
that the constant use of tobacco injures the teeth, 
which is contrary to an old view, and one which is 
even now commonly accepted. According to this 
writer, the injurious effects are not very noticeable 
until the person has been using the weed for about 
fifteen years, but the use of the pipe to excess will 
show its injurious effects in less time. 
* John D. Harper, D.D.S., in the Southern Dental Journal for Jan- 
uary, 1883. 229 
ALCOHOL AND OTHER NARCOTICS. 
305. Effect of Tobacco on the Heart.—While 
tobacco does not directly produce organic disease of 
the heart or other parts of the circulatory system, it 
renders the blood unnaturally fluid; it injures the red 
blood corpuscles, and disturbs the action of the heart 
and of the arteries. 
306. Effect of Tobacco on the Digestive 
System.—The tongue of the confirmed smoker is 
rarely clean, the appetite rarely perfect. The mucous 
membrane of the mouth, tongue, throat, and stomach 
suffers. The stomach is irritated and secretes its 
digestive fluids irregularly, which causes heartburn, 
eructation, and general debility. The muscular fibres 
of the stomach are also influenced, losing their tone 
and activity. The food, therefore, in a confirmed 
smoker, seldom passes through complete digestion. 
Dyspepsia is one of the’ maladies of the confirmed 
smoker, and the terms “ smoker’s sore throat,” and 
“ smoker’s tongue,” indicate familiar disorders. 
307. Effect of Tobacco on the Lungs. — The 
action of the smoke of tobacco on the mucous lining 
of the bronchial passages is to produce much irritation, 
attended often with cough and expectoration. When 
either pulmonary consumption or bronchitis is present, 
smoking adds to the mischief. 
308. Absinthe.—Absintlie or wormwood is a plant, 
from the tops and leaves of which an oil is made 
called wormwood oil, which is a poisonous substance. 
The liquor sold under the name of absinthe is one- 
half alcohol; the other half is made up of water, 230 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
aromatic oils, sugar, coloring-matter, and the oil of 
wormwood. In absinthe, therefore, evil effects are 
derived both from absinthe and from alcohol. Taken 
even in small quantities, absinthe gives rise to dys- 
pepsia, and it has a peculiar power to tempt its 
victims on and on to destruction. Absinthe causes 
grave evils to the nervous system. Weakness and 
trembling of the limbs are produced, and, later, giddi- 
ness and staggering. Partial insensibility and a fright- 
ful mental state, and severe convulsions may occur. 
A French physician records a case in which a man was 
picked up in the public street in an epileptic fit. He 
was known to be a large consumer of absinthe. The 
convulsions lasted until death—four days and four 
nights. During the last five or six hours of life the 
skin of the face became almost black. 
309. Indian Hemp, Opium, and Chloral.—From 
the dried tops of a plant known as Indian Hemp, a 
powerful intoxicating and narcotic drug is derived. 
Besides the term Indian Hemp, the preparations of 
the drug are known by other names, such as Hasch- 
ish and Bang. It produces a peculiar form of ex- 
citement and intoxication, with strange and some- 
times horrible dreams. Wasting of the muscles, 
sallowness of the skin, dulness of the mind, inter- 
ference with steadiness of movements, convulsive 
seizures, and loss of strength, result from the long- 
continued use of the drug.* Opium, or some of its 
preparations, such as laudanum, paregoric, or morphia, 
are resorted to by some foolish people. The habit 
* Drugs that Enslave, by H. H. Kane, M. T). 231 
QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
leads to dire results, and is most difficult to break. 
Chloral is another drug, the abuse of which has been 
the source of much misery. In those who become 
addicted to these drugs, and use them to excess, diges- 
tion, circulation, the nervous system, and mind may 
one or all suffer. Both opium and chloral make ab- 
ject slaves of those who use them. No one should 
use any of these drugs except on medical advice. 
310. One Drug Habit Leads to Another.—The 
habitual use of any drug, like alcohol, tobacco, ab- 
sinthe, chloral, opium, etc., is not only dangerous in 
itself, but the employment of one is apt to lead to the 
use of others. Frequently the man who uses alcohol 
to excess will be found to be fond of tobacco to ex- 
cess. Dr. Joseph Parrish, a well-known authority on 
subjects of this kind, says that he has known persons, 
habituated to the use of narcotics, who alternate be- 
tween morphia, chloral, whiskey, etc. They are not 
opium or chloral habitues, nor inebriates from alco- 
hol, but they are habituated to artificial narcotism. 
Questions for Review. 
What is the derivation of the word stimulant ? 
What is a stimulant ? 
What is the derivation of the word narcotic ? 
What is a narcotic ? 
Name some substances which'are stimulants in small, and narcotics 
in large quantities. 
What is the derivation of the word alcohol ? 
To what is the term fermentation applied ? 
Name some substances which have a special tendency to ferment. 232 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
What do the substances which yield alcohol contain ? 
What is distillation ? 
Name and describe the different forms of alcoholic beverages. 
What are some of the uses of alcohol in science ? 
What are some of its uses in medicine ? 
Give some medical conclusions in reference to the food value of 
alcohol. 
Why are alcoholic drinks often taken in winter ? Why in summer ? 
Give the views of Dr. Hayes, the Arctic explorer, in reference to 
alcohol. 
What was determined by Dr. Richardson in reference to death from 
alcohol ? 
Give the opinions of Parkes, Sir John Hall, and Dr. Livingstone 
in reference to alcohol. 
Does alcohol act as a poison ? 
From what is the word intoxication derived? 
What will strong alcohol produce ? 
What are the early symptoms of the injurious effects of alcohol? 
What are some of the special and terrible forms of alcoholic poi- 
soning? 
What is coma ? 
What is mania a potu ? 
Describe a case of delirium tremens. 
Name and describe some chronic forms of insanity caused by 
alcohol. 
What is the effect of alcohol on the muscular system ? 
Is physical endurance increased by the use of alcohol ? 
Describe the manner in which congestion of the brain is caused by 
the temporary use of alcohol. 
What changes result in the brain and its membranes from the con- 
tinued use of alcohol ? 
What do some authorities say of a brain once thoroughly over- 
come by alcohol ? 
Describe the experiments of Dr. Percy. 
Describe the first stage of the effect of excessive amounts of alco- 
hol on the nervous system; the second, the third, the fourth. 
Name some of the nervous derangements caused by the use of al- 
cohol. 
Describe the effect of alcohol on the eye. 
What effect has alcohol in relation to sleep ? QUESTIONS FOR REVIEW. 
233 
When only should narcotics be used ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the blood and blood-vessels? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the heart ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the liver ? 
Is alcohol food ? 
Recite Dr. Lees’ comparison of alcohol with food. 
What is the effect of alcohol on the digestion and on the stomach ? 
Describe Dr. Monroe’s experiments with alcohol and gastric juice? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the lungs ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the kidneys ? 
What effect does alcohol have on dogs ? 
What hereditary diseases are produced by alcohol ? 
What is the effect of alcohol on the moral nature ? 
Why do inebriates succumb quickly to acute diseases? 
Does alcohol shorten life ? 
Give the history of the use of tobacco. 
What is the origin of the word tobacco ? 
Give the composition of tobacco smoke. 
State the effects of the different constituents of tobacco. 
What are the general physiological effects of the use of tobacco ? 
What are some of the evil effects of tobacco on the young ? 
Describe the effect of tobacco on the nervous system. 
How does tobacco affect the sight? 
How does tobacco affect the hearing ? 
What effect has tobacco on the lips, tongue, and teeth ? 
What is the effect of tobacco on the heart ? 
What is the effect of tobacco on the digestive system ? 
What is the effect of tobacco on the lungs ? 
What is absinthe ? 
What is the composi tion of the liquor sold under the name of ab- 
sinthe ? 
How does absinthe affect the system ? 
What is Indian hemp ? 
What effect is produced by taking Indian hemp or its preparations ? 
What effect has the opium habit on the system ? 
What effect has the chloral habit on the system ? 
In what special way are drug habits dangerous ? 234 
FIRST LESSONS IN PHYSIOLOGY. 
Topical Analysis for the Study of Alcohol, 
Tobacco, etc. 
I.—Alcohol. 
1. Its Origin. 
a. Fermentation, b. Distillation. 
2. Its Forms. 
a. Wine. b. Beer. c. Cider, d. Whiskey, gin, rum, and 
brandy, e. “ Bitters.” 
3. Its Character. 
a. Not a food. b. A poison as commonly used. 
4. Its Proper Uses. 
a. In science and art. b. In medicine. 
5. Its Injurious Effects. 
a. On the muscular system, b. On the digestive organs, c. On 
the liver, d. On the heart, e. On the blood and blood- 
vessels. /. On the lungs, g. On the kidneys, h. On the eye. 
i. On the brain and nervous system, j. On the mind. 
k. On morality. 1. On physical endurance, m. On the du- 
ration of life. n. On the production of hereditary disease. 
II.—Tobacco. 
1. Its Composition. 
a. Watery vapor, b. Carbon, c. Ammonia, d. Carbonic 
acid. e. Nicotine. /. A volatile substance, g. A bitter 
extract. 
2. Its General Effects. 
a. Nervousness, b. Muscular weakness and tremor, c. Nau- 
sea, faintness. 
3. Its Injurious Effects on Different Organs. 
a. On the stomach, b. On the heart and blood, c. On the 
lungs, d. On sight, e. On hearing. /. On the lips, 
tongue, and teeth, g. On the nervous system. A. 
Abdomen, contents of, 18. 
Absinthe, 229. 
Absorption, definition of, 148. 
Air, composition of, 155; stationary 
and tidal, 161; the relation to health 
of pure, 166; the mode, in nature, of 
keeping pure, 166, 167; how ren- 
dered unwholesome, 167; amount 
required for health, 168; spoiled by 
one man’s breath, 168; carbonic 
acid in, 168, 169; walls of buildings 
permeable to, 174,175; temperature 
of, in living rooms, 176,177; moist- 
ure in living rooms of, 177. 
Air-Passages, diseases of, 170,171. 
Alcohol, derivation of the word, 
210; use of, in medicine and science, 
211; medical conclusions about, 
212; in relation to cold and heat, 
213; poisonous action of, 214; early 
symptoms of injurious effects of, 
214; some special forms of poison- 
ing by, 214; insanity caused by, 215; 
effect on muscular system, 216; 
physical endurance not increased 
by, 216; effect on the brain, 217; 
different stages in action of, on the 
nervous system, 217; nervous de- 
rangements produced by, 219; effect 
on the eye, 219; sleep produced by, 
219; effect on the blood, 220; effect 
on the heart, 221; effect on the 
liver, 221; not food, 222; contrasted 
with food, 222; effect on digestion 
and stomach, 222; experiments 
with gastric juice, 223; effect on the 
lungs, 224; effect on the kidneys. 
224 ; effect on dogs, 224 ; hereditary 
diseases produced by, 225; vice and 
crime the result of, 225; shortens 
life, 226. 
Alcoholic Beverages, 211. 
Anatomy, definition of, 16. 
Aorta, 128. 
Apparent drowning, 190,191. 
Arachnoid, 82. 
Arsenic, poisoning from, 200. 
Arteries, derivation of word, 128; 
description of, 128,129. 
Asphyxia, derivation of word, 189; 
description of, 189,190. 
Atlas, derivation of word, 42. 
Axis, situation of, 42. 
B. 
Backbone, description of, 38, 39. 
Bathing, use of, 74. 
Biceps Muscle, action of, 57, 58. 
Blood, 117; quantity in the living 
body, 117; composition of, 118; clot- 
ting or coagulation of, 119,120; water 
of, 121; mineral substances in, 122; 
uses of, 122; circulation of, 126; ma- 
chinery for distributing, 126; ab- 
sorption into, 150,151; need of oxy- 
gen in, 155,156; how oxygen gets 
into the, 161.162. 
Body, divisions of, 17; cavities of, 
17,18; coverings of, 19. 
Bones, structure of, 36,37; composi- 
tion of, 38; of the arm. leg, foot, 
skull, and wrist, 40, 41; uses of, 42; 
diseases of, 43; softness, in early 
life, 44; brittleness of, in old age, 44; 
effect of exercise on, 63. 
Brain, where situated, 80; divisions 236 
INDEX. 
of, 80; membranes of, 81, 82; func- 
tions of, 82, 83; reflex action of, 87, 
88; exercise of, 108; causes of dis- 
ease of, 109. 
Breathing, chief organs for, 156, 
157; part played by the nose in, 157. 
Bronchial Tubes, 159. 
Burns, what to do for, 194. 
c. 
Calisthenics, 69. 
Capillaries, derivation of word, 
and description, of, 130. 
Carbonic Acid, deadly effects of, 
169; in the blood, 182. 
Cells, 16,17. 
Cerebellum, 81. 
Cerebrum, 81. 
Chest, 160. 
Chloral, habit, 230, 231. 
Chyle, derivation of word, and de- 
scription of, 148. 
Circulation, description of the 
course of, 132. 
Collar-Bone, 40. 
Color-Blindness, 112. 
Coma, cause of, 214. 
Convulsions, description of, 193, 
194. 
Cooking, necessity of good, 140. 
Copper, poisoning, 201. 
Corrosive Sublimate, poisoning, 
201. 
Crowding, terrible results of, 170. 
, D. 
Delirium Tremens, 214,215. 
Dementia, 215. 
Development, one-sided, 43. 
Diaphragm, situation of, 160,161; 
description of, 160, 161; use of, 160, 
161. 
Digestion, meaning of word, 138; 
description of, 138; organs of, 145. 
Dipsomania, derivation of word, 
215; definition, 215. 
Dissection, 16. 
Distillation. 210. 
Drinks, use of, 141 
Drug habit, dangers of, 231. 
Dura Mater, 81, 82. 
E. 
Ear, divisions of, 101, 102; care of, 
112,113; insects in, 195,196. 
Eat, when and how to, 141. 
Epiglottis, derivation of word, 159; 
use of, 159. 
Excretion, definition of, 182; pro- 
cess of, 182, 183; by the skin, 183; 
by the lungs, 183, 181; by the kid- 
neys, 184; similarity of excreting or- 
gans, 184. 
Exercise, 62; muscular, 62; effect 
on various tissues and organs, 63; 
results of systematic, 64; deformities 
prevented or corrected by, 65; fit- 
ness, variety, and moderation in, 65; 
time for, 66; modes of, 69; physical, 
educational, 69; systematic, 69; out- 
door, 73; development of both sides 
of body by, 75, 76; recreative, 76. 
Expiration, 160. 
Eye* media of, 96, 97; coats, or cov- 
erings of, 98; blending of light in, 
99; sclerotic coat, 98; choroid coat, 
98; foreign bodies in. 194,195. 
F. 
Fainting, 192,193. 
Fat, 21. 
Fermentation, 210. 
Fibrin, composition of, 121. 
Food, definition of, 137, 138; kinds 
of, 138; different classes of, 138,139; 
remarks on the different kinds of, 
139,140; quantity required, 140. 
Function, definition of, 16. 
G. 
Gaines, open air, 76. 
Ganglia, where found, 80. 
Gland, 20. 
Glottis, derivation of word, 158; 
use of, 158. 
Gymnastic, apparatus, 72. 
Gymnastics, definition of, 69. 
Cells, 16,17. 237 
INDEX. 
H. 
Head, movements of, 42. 
Hearing, organ of, 101; nerve of, 
102; process of, 102. 
Heart, description of, 126,127; valves 
of, 127; contraction of, 130,131. 
Hygiene, definition and derivation 
of word, 16; rules of simple, 187, 
188,189. 
I. 
Indian Hemp, 230. 
Inspiration, 160. 
J. 
Joints, description of, 47; immova- 
ble, 47,48; movable, 48; hinge, ball- 
and-socket, and pivot, 48; ligaments 
of, 48, 49; pressure of air upon, 49, 
50; unusual motion in, 50; uses of, 
50; injuries of, 51. 
. L. 
I.aeteals, derivation of word, 149; 
use of, 149. 
I<arge Intestines, 151. 
Larynx, description of, 157,158; lid 
of, 159. 
lievers, description of, 58, 59. 
Limbs, movements of, 54. 
Liver, circulation through, 133. 
Locomotion, definition of, 53. 
Lunar Caustic, poisoning from, 
201. 
Lungs, where situated, 160; diseases 
of, 170: clothing with reference to 
the, 170. 
lymphatics, description of, 150; 
use of, 150; glands, 150. 
M. 
Mania, 215. 
Mania-a-potu, 214, 215. 
Medulla Oblongata, description 
of, 81. 
Melancholia, 215. 
Mouth, food in, 145,146. 
Motion, 53. 
Mucous Membrane, description 
of, 20. 
Muscles, 54; names of, 56; different 
parts of, 56; structure of, 57; con- 
traction of, 57; action of, 59; effect 
of exercise on, 63. 
Muscular 1'ontraetility, 62. 
N. 
Narcotics, 209. 
Nerves, definition of, 80; kinds of, 
83; cranial, 85; spinal, 86; in-com- 
ing and out-going, 86; sensory and 
motor, 87; sympathetic system of, 
88; auditory, 102, 103. 
Nervous System, parts of, 80; 
gray and white matter of, 80; im- 
portance of caring for, 108; causes 
of diseases of, 109. 
Nose, foreign bodies in, 196; bleed- 
ing from the, 196,197. 
Noxious Oases, asphyxia from, 
191,192. 
Nux Vomica or Strychnia, 
poisoning from, 201. 
o. 
Opium, habit, 230; poisoning from, 
201, 202. 
Organ, definition of, 16; functions 
of, 21. 
Oxidation, 162. 
P. 
Paralysis, 109, 110. 
Phosphorus, poisoning from, 201. 
Physiology, derivation of word, 
15 ; definition of, 15; human, 15,16. 
Pia Mater, 82. 
Poisons, mode of procedure in 
cases of poisoning, 198, 199; differ- 
ent classes of, 199. 
Pons Varolii, 81. 
Pure Water, 141,142. 238 
INDEX. 
R. 
Red Corpuscles, 118,119. 
Retina, 99,100. 
Ribs, position of, 40. 
Rickets, 43, 44. 
Rifling, 75. 
Rowing, 74, 75. 
Running, 74. 
s. 
Scalds, 194. 
Seeing, process of, 100. 
Sensation, definition of, and ex- 
planation of, 95. 
Sense, of feeling, 96; of sight, 97,98; 
of smell, 103, 104. 
Serum, composition of, 120,121. 
Shoulder-blade, position of, 40. 
Sight, defects of, 111; how to pre- 
serve, 111, 112. 
Sitting, 73. 
Skeleton, definition of, 36; human, 
36 ; number of bones in, 36. 
Skin, description of, 19; appendages 
of, 19; lining of, 20. 
Sleep, 110. 
Small Intestines, 147. 
Special Senses, 96; cultivation of, 
113. 
Speech, 158. 
Spinal Canal, 18. 
Spinal Cord, description of, 83; 
reflex action of, 87, 88. 
Spine, movements of, 42. 
Spleen, 133. 
Sprains, 194. 
Standing. 73. 
Stimulants, 209. 
Stomach, 146,147. 
Sugar of Eead, poisoning from, 
201. 
Swimming, 74. 
Sympathetic System, 88, 89. 
Synovial Fluid, 47. 
T. 
Tartar Emetic, poisoning from, 
201. 
Taste, 103. 
Tendon of Achilles, 56, 57. 
Tendons, 56. 
Thoracic I>nct, 149,150. 
Throat, foreign bodies in, 196. 
Tissue, definition of, 16; connec- 
tive, 20. 
Tobacco, history of the use of, 226; 
derivation of the word, 226; compo- 
sition of, 227; effects of different 
constituents, 227; general physio- 
logical effects, 227; evil effects on 
the young, 227; effects on the nerv- 
ous system, 228; on sight and hear- 
ing, 228; on the lips, tongue, and 
teeth, 228 ; on the heart, 229; on the 
digestion, 229; on the lungs, 229. 
U. 
Urea, 182. 
V. 
Veins, 130. 
Ventilation, derivation of word, 
173; definition of, 173; objects to be 
aimed at in, 173; natural, 174; arti- 
ficial, 175,176; relation of inlets to 
outlets in, 176; of school-room, and 
public building, 177,178; bed-room, 
178. 
Vertebrae, derivation of word, 39; 
construction of, 39. 
Villi, 149. 
Vocal Chords, 158. 
Voice Box, 157,158. 
W. 
Walking', 73, 74. 
Waste, 180. 
Wear, 180. 
White Corpuscles, 119. 
Windpipe, 157. 
Wounds, bleeding from, 197,198. Model Text-Books 
CHASE & STUART’S CLASSICAL SERIES. 
COMPRISING 
A First Latin Booh, 
-A Latin Grammar, 
A Latin Reader, 
Caesar’s Commentaries, 
First Six Boohs of Mneid, 
Virgil’s Mneid, 
Virgil’s Eclogues and Georgies, 
Cicero’s Select Orations, 
Horace’s Odes, Satires, and Epistles, 
Sallust’s Catiline et Jugurtha, 
Cicero Be Senectute, et Be Amicitia, 
Cornelius JV'epos, 
Cicero Be Officiis, 
Cicero’s Tusculan Disputations, 
Cicero de Oratore, 
Terence, 
Ovid. 
Juvenal, 
Tacitus, 
Livy. A 
SERIES OF TEXT-BOOKS 
ON THE 
ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 
JOHN S. HART, LL.D., 
Late Professor of Rhetoric and of the English Language in the 
College of New Jersey. 
The Series comprises the following volumes, viz.: 
Language Lessons for Beginners, 
Elementary English Grammar, 
English Grammar and Analysis, 
First Lessons in Composition, 
Composition and Rhetoric, 
A Short Course in Literature, 
A Class-Booh of Poetry, 
A Manual of American Literature, 
A Manual of English Literature. 
THE 
MODEL SERIES OF ARITHMETICS. 
By EDGAR A. SINGER, A.M., 
Principal of the Henry IF. Halliwell Grammar School, Philadelphia. 
The Model Primary Arithmetic, 
The Model Elementary Arithmetic, 
The Model Mental Arithmetic, 
The Model Practical Arithmetic, 
The Model Test Arithmetic. In Preparation. 
COMPRISING 
2 Easy Lessons in Natural Philosophy. 
For Children. By Prof. Edwin J. Houston, A.M. 
Intermediate Lessons in Natural Philosophy. 
By Prof. Edwin J. Houston, A.M. 
Elements of Natural Philosophy. 
For Schools and Academies. By Edwin J. HOUSTON, A.M. 
Elements of Chemistry. 
For Academies and Colleges. By Prof. E. J. Houston, A.M. 
A Short Course in Chemistry. 
For High Schools. By Prof. E. J. Houston, A.M. 
Elements of Physical Geography. 
By Edwin J. Houston, A.M., Prof, of Physics and Physical 
Geography in the Central High School of Philadelphia. 
The latest and best book on the subject. A text-book that 
will gladen the hearts of teachers and pupils. More generally 
used than any other work on the subject. 
Christian Ethics; or, The Science of the Life of 
Human Duty. 
A New Text-Book on Moral Science. By Eev. D. S. Gregory, 
D.D., President of Lake Forest University, Illinois. 
Practical Logic; or, The Art of Thinking. 
By Eev. D. S. Gregory, D.D. 
Grocsheck’s Practical Book-Keeping Series. 
By Prof. John Groesbeck, Prin. of the Crittenden Commer- 
cial College. In Two Yolumes, viz.: 
College Edition, for Commercial Schools, Colleges, &e. 
School Edition, for Schools and Academies. 
An Elementary Algebra. 
A Text-Book for Schools and Academies. By Joseph W. 
Wilson, A.M., Professor of Mathematics in the Philadelphia 
Central High School. 
The Crittenden Commercial Arithmetic and 
Business Manual. New Edition, Dec., 1882. 
Designed for the use of Teachers, Business Men, Academies, 
High Schools, and Commercial Colleges. By Prof. John 
Groesbeck. 
A Manual of Elocution and Reading. 
Founded on Philosophy of the Human Voice. By EDWARD 
Brooks, Ph.D., Prin. of State Normal School, Millersville, Pa. 
3 The Model Deflner. 
A Book for Beginners, containing Definitions, Etymology, and 
Sentences as Models, exhibiting the correct use of Words. By 
A. C. Webb. 
The Model Etymology. 
Containing Definitions, Etymology, Latin Derivatives, Sen- 
tences as Models, and Analysis. With a Key containing the 
Analysis of every word which could present any difficulties to 
the learner. By A. C. Webb. 
A Manual of Etymology. 
Containing Definitions, Etymology, Latin Derivatives, Greek 
Derivatives, Sentences as Models, and Analysis. With a Key 
containing the Analysis of every word which could present any 
difficulties to the learner. By A. C. Webb. 
The Model Speaker. 
Consisting of Exercises in Prose and Poetry, Suitable for Keci- 
tation, Declamation, Public Headings, etc. Compiled for the 
use of Schools and Academies, by Prof. Philip Lawrence. 
First Lessons in Physiology and Hygiene. 
By Charles K. Mills, M.D. 
Anatomy, Physiology, and Hygiene. 
A Text-Book for Schools, Academies, Colleges, and Families. 
By Joseph C. Martindale, M.D. 
First Lessons in Natural Philosophy. 
For Beginners. By Joseph C. Martindale, M.D. 
A Hand-Book of Literature, English and American. 
By E. J. TRIMBLE, Prof, of Literature, State Normal School, 
West Chester, Pa. 
A Short Course ill Literature, English and American. 
By E. J. Trimble. 
Short Studies in Literature, English and American. 
By A. P. Southwick, A.M. 
The Constitution of the United States. 
For Schools, with Questions under each Clause. By Prof. JOHN 
S. Hart, LL.D. Should be taught in every school. 
A Hand-Book of Mythology. 
By S. A. Edwards, Teacher of Mythology in the Girls’ Normal 
School, Philadelphia. 
4 A Hand-Book of Civil Government. 
By Thomas D. Suplee, A. M., Head-Master of Hareourt Place 
School, Gambier, Ohio. 
3000 Practice Words. 
By Prof. J. Willis Westlake, A.M., State Normal School, 
Millersville, Pa. Contains lists of Familiar Words often Mis- 
spelled, Difficult Words, Homophonous Words, Words often 
Confounded, Rules for Spelling, etc. It is a book that every 
teacher wants. Handsomely bound in flexible cloth, crimson 
edges. 
In the School-Room; 
Or, Chapters in the Philosophy op Education. Gives 
the experience of nearly forty years spent in school-room work. 
By John S. Hart, LL.D. 
The Model Pocket-Register and Grade-Book. 
A Roll-Book, Record, and Grade-Book combined. Adapted to 
all grades of Classes, whether in College, Academy, Seminary, 
High or Primary School. Handsomely bound in fine English 
cloth, bevelled sides, crimson edges. 
The Model School Diary. 
Designed as an aid in securing the co-operation of parents. It 
consists of a Record of the Attendance, Deportment, Recita- 
tions, etc., of the Scholar for every day. At the close of the 
week it is to be sent to the parent or guardian for his examina- 
tion and signature. 
The Model Monthly Report. 
Similar to the Model School Diary, excepting that it is intended 
for a Monthly instead of a Weekly report of the Attendance, 
Recitations, etc., of the pupil. 
The Model Roll-Book, No. 1, 
The Model Roll-Book, No. 2. 
The Model Roll-Book, No. 1, is so ruled as to show at a 
glance the record of a class for three months, allowing five 
weeks to each month, with spacing for weekly, monthly, and 
quarterly summary, and a blank space for remarks at the end 
of the quarter. 
The Model Roll-Book, No. 2, is arranged on the same 
general plan, as regards spacing, etc., excepting that each page 
is arranged for a month of five weeks; but, in addition, the 
names of the studies generally pursued in schools are printed immediately following the name of the pupil, making it more 
convenient when it is desirable to have a record of all the stud- 
ies pursued by a pupil brought together in one place. 
4SC Specimen Sheets sent by Mail on application. 
Manuals for Teachers. 
A Series of Iland-Books comprising five volumes, which it is 
believed will prove a valuable contribution to the art and sci- 
ence of Teaching. Printed on the best quality of calendered 
paper and handsomely bound. 
1. On the Cultivation of the Senses. 
2. On the Cultivation of the Memory. 
8. On the Use of Words. 
4. On Discipline. 
5. On Class Teaching. 
The Teacher. 
v A Monthly Journal devoted to the interests of Teachers, Schools, 
and the Cause of Education in general. Subscription price, 50 
cents per annum. Specimen copy sent free. 
We shall he gratified to have teachers correspond with us. We 
offer some of the best of Modern Text-Books, and shall be glad at 
any time to make liberal arrangements for the introduction of our 
books, or to exchange for others that do not give satisfaction. Send 
for our catalogue, and for descriptive circulars of any of our books 
of which you desire information. Please address 
Eldredge & Brother, 
17 North Seventh Street, 
PHILADELPHIA. 
6